]>
Commit | Line | Data |
---|---|---|
1 | ///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// | |
2 | // Name: src/msw/window.cpp | |
3 | // Purpose: wxWindowMSW | |
4 | // Author: Julian Smart | |
5 | // Modified by: VZ on 13.05.99: no more Default(), MSWOnXXX() reorganisation | |
6 | // Created: 04/01/98 | |
7 | // RCS-ID: $Id$ | |
8 | // Copyright: (c) Julian Smart | |
9 | // Licence: wxWindows licence | |
10 | ///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// | |
11 | ||
12 | // =========================================================================== | |
13 | // declarations | |
14 | // =========================================================================== | |
15 | ||
16 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
17 | // headers | |
18 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
19 | ||
20 | // For compilers that support precompilation, includes "wx.h". | |
21 | #include "wx/wxprec.h" | |
22 | ||
23 | #ifdef __BORLANDC__ | |
24 | #pragma hdrstop | |
25 | #endif | |
26 | ||
27 | #include "wx/window.h" | |
28 | ||
29 | #ifndef WX_PRECOMP | |
30 | #include "wx/msw/wrapwin.h" | |
31 | #include "wx/msw/wrapcctl.h" // include <commctrl.h> "properly" | |
32 | #include "wx/msw/missing.h" | |
33 | #include "wx/accel.h" | |
34 | #include "wx/menu.h" | |
35 | #include "wx/dc.h" | |
36 | #include "wx/dcclient.h" | |
37 | #include "wx/dcmemory.h" | |
38 | #include "wx/utils.h" | |
39 | #include "wx/app.h" | |
40 | #include "wx/layout.h" | |
41 | #include "wx/dialog.h" | |
42 | #include "wx/frame.h" | |
43 | #include "wx/listbox.h" | |
44 | #include "wx/button.h" | |
45 | #include "wx/msgdlg.h" | |
46 | #include "wx/settings.h" | |
47 | #include "wx/statbox.h" | |
48 | #include "wx/sizer.h" | |
49 | #include "wx/intl.h" | |
50 | #include "wx/log.h" | |
51 | #include "wx/textctrl.h" | |
52 | #include "wx/menuitem.h" | |
53 | #include "wx/module.h" | |
54 | #endif | |
55 | ||
56 | #if wxUSE_OWNER_DRAWN && !defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__) | |
57 | #include "wx/ownerdrw.h" | |
58 | #endif | |
59 | ||
60 | #include "wx/hashmap.h" | |
61 | #include "wx/evtloop.h" | |
62 | #include "wx/power.h" | |
63 | #include "wx/sysopt.h" | |
64 | ||
65 | #if wxUSE_DRAG_AND_DROP | |
66 | #include "wx/dnd.h" | |
67 | #endif | |
68 | ||
69 | #if wxUSE_ACCESSIBILITY | |
70 | #include "wx/access.h" | |
71 | #include <ole2.h> | |
72 | #include <oleacc.h> | |
73 | #ifndef WM_GETOBJECT | |
74 | #define WM_GETOBJECT 0x003D | |
75 | #endif | |
76 | #ifndef OBJID_CLIENT | |
77 | #define OBJID_CLIENT 0xFFFFFFFC | |
78 | #endif | |
79 | #endif | |
80 | ||
81 | #include "wx/msw/private.h" | |
82 | #include "wx/msw/private/keyboard.h" | |
83 | #include "wx/msw/dcclient.h" | |
84 | ||
85 | #if wxUSE_TOOLTIPS | |
86 | #include "wx/tooltip.h" | |
87 | #endif | |
88 | ||
89 | #if wxUSE_CARET | |
90 | #include "wx/caret.h" | |
91 | #endif // wxUSE_CARET | |
92 | ||
93 | #if wxUSE_RADIOBOX | |
94 | #include "wx/radiobox.h" | |
95 | #endif // wxUSE_RADIOBOX | |
96 | ||
97 | #if wxUSE_SPINCTRL | |
98 | #include "wx/spinctrl.h" | |
99 | #endif // wxUSE_SPINCTRL | |
100 | ||
101 | #include "wx/notebook.h" | |
102 | #include "wx/listctrl.h" | |
103 | #include "wx/dynlib.h" | |
104 | ||
105 | #include <string.h> | |
106 | ||
107 | #if (!defined(__GNUWIN32_OLD__) && !defined(__WXMICROWIN__) /* && !defined(__WXWINCE__) */ ) || defined(__CYGWIN10__) | |
108 | #include <shellapi.h> | |
109 | #include <mmsystem.h> | |
110 | #endif | |
111 | ||
112 | #ifdef __WIN32__ | |
113 | #include <windowsx.h> | |
114 | #endif | |
115 | ||
116 | #if !defined __WXWINCE__ && !defined NEED_PBT_H | |
117 | #include <pbt.h> | |
118 | #endif | |
119 | ||
120 | #if defined(__WXWINCE__) | |
121 | #include "wx/msw/wince/missing.h" | |
122 | #ifdef __POCKETPC__ | |
123 | #include <windows.h> | |
124 | #include <shellapi.h> | |
125 | #include <ole2.h> | |
126 | #include <aygshell.h> | |
127 | #endif | |
128 | #endif | |
129 | ||
130 | #if wxUSE_UXTHEME | |
131 | #include "wx/msw/uxtheme.h" | |
132 | #define EP_EDITTEXT 1 | |
133 | #define ETS_NORMAL 1 | |
134 | #define ETS_HOT 2 | |
135 | #define ETS_SELECTED 3 | |
136 | #define ETS_DISABLED 4 | |
137 | #define ETS_FOCUSED 5 | |
138 | #define ETS_READONLY 6 | |
139 | #define ETS_ASSIST 7 | |
140 | #endif | |
141 | ||
142 | // define the constants used by AnimateWindow() if our SDK doesn't have them | |
143 | #ifndef AW_CENTER | |
144 | #define AW_HOR_POSITIVE 0x00000001 | |
145 | #define AW_HOR_NEGATIVE 0x00000002 | |
146 | #define AW_VER_POSITIVE 0x00000004 | |
147 | #define AW_VER_NEGATIVE 0x00000008 | |
148 | #define AW_CENTER 0x00000010 | |
149 | #define AW_HIDE 0x00010000 | |
150 | #define AW_ACTIVATE 0x00020000 | |
151 | #define AW_SLIDE 0x00040000 | |
152 | #define AW_BLEND 0x00080000 | |
153 | #endif | |
154 | ||
155 | #if defined(TME_LEAVE) && defined(WM_MOUSELEAVE) && wxUSE_DYNLIB_CLASS | |
156 | #define HAVE_TRACKMOUSEEVENT | |
157 | #endif // everything needed for TrackMouseEvent() | |
158 | ||
159 | // set this to 1 to filter out duplicate mouse events, e.g. mouse move events | |
160 | // when mouse position didnd't change | |
161 | #ifdef __WXWINCE__ | |
162 | #define wxUSE_MOUSEEVENT_HACK 0 | |
163 | #else | |
164 | #define wxUSE_MOUSEEVENT_HACK 1 | |
165 | #endif | |
166 | ||
167 | // not all compilers/platforms have X button related declarations (notably | |
168 | // Windows CE doesn't, and probably some old SDKs don't neither) | |
169 | #ifdef WM_XBUTTONDOWN | |
170 | #define wxHAS_XBUTTON | |
171 | #endif | |
172 | ||
173 | #ifndef MAPVK_VK_TO_CHAR | |
174 | #define MAPVK_VK_TO_CHAR 2 | |
175 | #endif | |
176 | ||
177 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
178 | // global variables | |
179 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
180 | ||
181 | #if wxUSE_MENUS_NATIVE | |
182 | extern wxMenu *wxCurrentPopupMenu; | |
183 | #endif | |
184 | ||
185 | #if wxUSE_UXTHEME | |
186 | // This is a hack used by the owner-drawn wxButton implementation to ensure | |
187 | // that the brush used for erasing its background is correctly aligned with the | |
188 | // control. | |
189 | wxWindowMSW *wxWindowBeingErased = NULL; | |
190 | #endif // wxUSE_UXTHEME | |
191 | ||
192 | namespace | |
193 | { | |
194 | ||
195 | // true if we had already created the std colour map, used by | |
196 | // wxGetStdColourMap() and wxWindow::OnSysColourChanged() (FIXME-MT) | |
197 | bool gs_hasStdCmap = false; | |
198 | ||
199 | // last mouse event information we need to filter out the duplicates | |
200 | #if wxUSE_MOUSEEVENT_HACK | |
201 | struct MouseEventInfoDummy | |
202 | { | |
203 | // mouse position (in screen coordinates) | |
204 | wxPoint pos; | |
205 | ||
206 | // last mouse event type | |
207 | wxEventType type; | |
208 | } gs_lastMouseEvent; | |
209 | #endif // wxUSE_MOUSEEVENT_HACK | |
210 | ||
211 | // hash containing the registered handlers for the custom messages | |
212 | WX_DECLARE_HASH_MAP(int, wxWindow::MSWMessageHandler, | |
213 | wxIntegerHash, wxIntegerEqual, | |
214 | MSWMessageHandlers); | |
215 | ||
216 | MSWMessageHandlers gs_messageHandlers; | |
217 | ||
218 | // hash containing all our windows, it uses HWND keys and wxWindow* values | |
219 | WX_DECLARE_HASH_MAP(HWND, wxWindow *, | |
220 | wxPointerHash, wxPointerEqual, | |
221 | WindowHandles); | |
222 | ||
223 | WindowHandles gs_windowHandles; | |
224 | ||
225 | #ifdef wxHAS_MSW_BACKGROUND_ERASE_HOOK | |
226 | ||
227 | // temporary override for WM_ERASEBKGND processing: we don't store this in | |
228 | // wxWindow itself as we don't need it during most of the time so don't | |
229 | // increase the size of all window objects unnecessarily | |
230 | WX_DECLARE_HASH_MAP(wxWindow *, wxWindow *, | |
231 | wxPointerHash, wxPointerEqual, | |
232 | EraseBgHooks); | |
233 | ||
234 | EraseBgHooks gs_eraseBgHooks; | |
235 | ||
236 | #endif // wxHAS_MSW_BACKGROUND_ERASE_HOOK | |
237 | ||
238 | // If this variable is strictly positive, EVT_CHAR_HOOK is not generated for | |
239 | // Escape key presses as it can't be intercepted because it's needed by some | |
240 | // currently shown window, e.g. IME entry. | |
241 | // | |
242 | // This is currently global as we allow using UI from the main thread only | |
243 | // anyhow but could be replaced with a thread-specific value in the future if | |
244 | // needed. | |
245 | int gs_modalEntryWindowCount = 0; | |
246 | ||
247 | } // anonymous namespace | |
248 | ||
249 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
250 | // private functions | |
251 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
252 | ||
253 | // the window proc for all our windows | |
254 | LRESULT WXDLLEXPORT APIENTRY _EXPORT wxWndProc(HWND hWnd, UINT message, | |
255 | WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam); | |
256 | ||
257 | ||
258 | #if wxDEBUG_LEVEL >= 2 | |
259 | const wxChar *wxGetMessageName(int message); | |
260 | #endif // wxDEBUG_LEVEL >= 2 | |
261 | ||
262 | void wxRemoveHandleAssociation(wxWindowMSW *win); | |
263 | extern void wxAssociateWinWithHandle(HWND hWnd, wxWindowMSW *win); | |
264 | ||
265 | // get the text metrics for the current font | |
266 | static TEXTMETRIC wxGetTextMetrics(const wxWindowMSW *win); | |
267 | ||
268 | #ifdef __WXWINCE__ | |
269 | // find the window for the mouse event at the specified position | |
270 | static wxWindowMSW *FindWindowForMouseEvent(wxWindowMSW *win, int *x, int *y); | |
271 | #endif // __WXWINCE__ | |
272 | ||
273 | // wrapper around BringWindowToTop() API | |
274 | static inline void wxBringWindowToTop(HWND hwnd) | |
275 | { | |
276 | #ifdef __WXMICROWIN__ | |
277 | // It seems that MicroWindows brings the _parent_ of the window to the top, | |
278 | // which can be the wrong one. | |
279 | ||
280 | // activate (set focus to) specified window | |
281 | ::SetFocus(hwnd); | |
282 | #endif | |
283 | ||
284 | // raise top level parent to top of z order | |
285 | if (!::SetWindowPos(hwnd, HWND_TOP, 0, 0, 0, 0, SWP_NOMOVE | SWP_NOSIZE)) | |
286 | { | |
287 | wxLogLastError(wxT("SetWindowPos")); | |
288 | } | |
289 | } | |
290 | ||
291 | #ifndef __WXWINCE__ | |
292 | ||
293 | // ensure that all our parent windows have WS_EX_CONTROLPARENT style | |
294 | static void EnsureParentHasControlParentStyle(wxWindow *parent) | |
295 | { | |
296 | /* | |
297 | If we have WS_EX_CONTROLPARENT flag we absolutely *must* set it for our | |
298 | parent as well as otherwise several Win32 functions using | |
299 | GetNextDlgTabItem() to iterate over all controls such as | |
300 | IsDialogMessage() or DefDlgProc() would enter an infinite loop: indeed, | |
301 | all of them iterate over all the controls starting from the currently | |
302 | focused one and stop iterating when they get back to the focus but | |
303 | unless all parents have WS_EX_CONTROLPARENT bit set, they would never | |
304 | get back to the initial (focused) window: as we do have this style, | |
305 | GetNextDlgTabItem() will leave this window and continue in its parent, | |
306 | but if the parent doesn't have it, it wouldn't recurse inside it later | |
307 | on and so wouldn't have a chance of getting back to this window either. | |
308 | */ | |
309 | while ( parent && !parent->IsTopLevel() ) | |
310 | { | |
311 | LONG exStyle = wxGetWindowExStyle(parent); | |
312 | if ( !(exStyle & WS_EX_CONTROLPARENT) ) | |
313 | { | |
314 | // force the parent to have this style | |
315 | wxSetWindowExStyle(parent, exStyle | WS_EX_CONTROLPARENT); | |
316 | } | |
317 | ||
318 | parent = parent->GetParent(); | |
319 | } | |
320 | } | |
321 | ||
322 | #endif // !__WXWINCE__ | |
323 | ||
324 | #ifdef __WXWINCE__ | |
325 | // On Windows CE, GetCursorPos can return an error, so use this function | |
326 | // instead | |
327 | bool GetCursorPosWinCE(POINT* pt) | |
328 | { | |
329 | if (!GetCursorPos(pt)) | |
330 | { | |
331 | DWORD pos = GetMessagePos(); | |
332 | pt->x = LOWORD(pos); | |
333 | pt->y = HIWORD(pos); | |
334 | } | |
335 | return true; | |
336 | } | |
337 | #endif | |
338 | ||
339 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
340 | // event tables | |
341 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
342 | ||
343 | // in wxUniv/MSW this class is abstract because it doesn't have DoPopupMenu() | |
344 | // method | |
345 | #ifdef __WXUNIVERSAL__ | |
346 | IMPLEMENT_ABSTRACT_CLASS(wxWindowMSW, wxWindowBase) | |
347 | #endif // __WXUNIVERSAL__ | |
348 | ||
349 | BEGIN_EVENT_TABLE(wxWindowMSW, wxWindowBase) | |
350 | EVT_SYS_COLOUR_CHANGED(wxWindowMSW::OnSysColourChanged) | |
351 | #ifdef __WXWINCE__ | |
352 | EVT_INIT_DIALOG(wxWindowMSW::OnInitDialog) | |
353 | #endif | |
354 | END_EVENT_TABLE() | |
355 | ||
356 | // =========================================================================== | |
357 | // implementation | |
358 | // =========================================================================== | |
359 | ||
360 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
361 | // wxWindow utility functions | |
362 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
363 | ||
364 | // Find an item given the MS Windows id | |
365 | wxWindow *wxWindowMSW::FindItem(long id) const | |
366 | { | |
367 | #if wxUSE_CONTROLS | |
368 | wxControl *item = wxDynamicCastThis(wxControl); | |
369 | if ( item ) | |
370 | { | |
371 | // is it us or one of our "internal" children? | |
372 | if ( item->GetId() == id | |
373 | #ifndef __WXUNIVERSAL__ | |
374 | || (item->GetSubcontrols().Index(id) != wxNOT_FOUND) | |
375 | #endif // __WXUNIVERSAL__ | |
376 | ) | |
377 | { | |
378 | return item; | |
379 | } | |
380 | } | |
381 | #endif // wxUSE_CONTROLS | |
382 | ||
383 | wxWindowList::compatibility_iterator current = GetChildren().GetFirst(); | |
384 | while (current) | |
385 | { | |
386 | wxWindow *childWin = current->GetData(); | |
387 | ||
388 | wxWindow *wnd = childWin->FindItem(id); | |
389 | if ( wnd ) | |
390 | return wnd; | |
391 | ||
392 | current = current->GetNext(); | |
393 | } | |
394 | ||
395 | return NULL; | |
396 | } | |
397 | ||
398 | // Find an item given the MS Windows handle | |
399 | wxWindow *wxWindowMSW::FindItemByHWND(WXHWND hWnd, bool controlOnly) const | |
400 | { | |
401 | wxWindowList::compatibility_iterator current = GetChildren().GetFirst(); | |
402 | while (current) | |
403 | { | |
404 | wxWindow *parent = current->GetData(); | |
405 | ||
406 | // Do a recursive search. | |
407 | wxWindow *wnd = parent->FindItemByHWND(hWnd); | |
408 | if ( wnd ) | |
409 | return wnd; | |
410 | ||
411 | if ( !controlOnly | |
412 | #if wxUSE_CONTROLS | |
413 | || parent->IsKindOf(CLASSINFO(wxControl)) | |
414 | #endif // wxUSE_CONTROLS | |
415 | ) | |
416 | { | |
417 | wxWindow *item = current->GetData(); | |
418 | if ( item->GetHWND() == hWnd ) | |
419 | return item; | |
420 | else | |
421 | { | |
422 | if ( item->ContainsHWND(hWnd) ) | |
423 | return item; | |
424 | } | |
425 | } | |
426 | ||
427 | current = current->GetNext(); | |
428 | } | |
429 | return NULL; | |
430 | } | |
431 | ||
432 | // Default command handler | |
433 | bool wxWindowMSW::MSWCommand(WXUINT WXUNUSED(param), WXWORD WXUNUSED(id)) | |
434 | { | |
435 | return false; | |
436 | } | |
437 | ||
438 | // ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
439 | // constructors and such | |
440 | // ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
441 | ||
442 | void wxWindowMSW::Init() | |
443 | { | |
444 | // MSW specific | |
445 | m_oldWndProc = NULL; | |
446 | m_mouseInWindow = false; | |
447 | m_lastKeydownProcessed = false; | |
448 | ||
449 | m_hWnd = 0; | |
450 | ||
451 | m_xThumbSize = 0; | |
452 | m_yThumbSize = 0; | |
453 | ||
454 | #if wxUSE_DEFERRED_SIZING | |
455 | m_hDWP = 0; | |
456 | m_pendingPosition = wxDefaultPosition; | |
457 | m_pendingSize = wxDefaultSize; | |
458 | #endif // wxUSE_DEFERRED_SIZING | |
459 | ||
460 | #ifdef __POCKETPC__ | |
461 | m_contextMenuEnabled = false; | |
462 | #endif | |
463 | } | |
464 | ||
465 | // Destructor | |
466 | wxWindowMSW::~wxWindowMSW() | |
467 | { | |
468 | SendDestroyEvent(); | |
469 | ||
470 | #ifndef __WXUNIVERSAL__ | |
471 | // VS: make sure there's no wxFrame with last focus set to us: | |
472 | for ( wxWindow *win = GetParent(); win; win = win->GetParent() ) | |
473 | { | |
474 | wxTopLevelWindow *frame = wxDynamicCast(win, wxTopLevelWindow); | |
475 | if ( frame ) | |
476 | { | |
477 | if ( frame->GetLastFocus() == this ) | |
478 | { | |
479 | frame->SetLastFocus(NULL); | |
480 | } | |
481 | ||
482 | // apparently sometimes we can end up with our grand parent | |
483 | // pointing to us as well: this is surely a bug in focus handling | |
484 | // code but it's not clear where it happens so for now just try to | |
485 | // fix it here by not breaking out of the loop | |
486 | //break; | |
487 | } | |
488 | } | |
489 | #endif // __WXUNIVERSAL__ | |
490 | ||
491 | // VS: destroy children first and _then_ detach *this from its parent. | |
492 | // If we did it the other way around, children wouldn't be able | |
493 | // find their parent frame (see above). | |
494 | DestroyChildren(); | |
495 | ||
496 | if ( m_hWnd ) | |
497 | { | |
498 | // VZ: test temp removed to understand what really happens here | |
499 | //if (::IsWindow(GetHwnd())) | |
500 | { | |
501 | if ( !::DestroyWindow(GetHwnd()) ) | |
502 | { | |
503 | wxLogLastError(wxT("DestroyWindow")); | |
504 | } | |
505 | } | |
506 | ||
507 | // remove hWnd <-> wxWindow association | |
508 | wxRemoveHandleAssociation(this); | |
509 | } | |
510 | ||
511 | } | |
512 | ||
513 | /* static */ | |
514 | const wxChar *wxWindowMSW::MSWGetRegisteredClassName() | |
515 | { | |
516 | return wxApp::GetRegisteredClassName(wxT("wxWindow"), COLOR_BTNFACE); | |
517 | } | |
518 | ||
519 | // real construction (Init() must have been called before!) | |
520 | bool wxWindowMSW::Create(wxWindow *parent, | |
521 | wxWindowID id, | |
522 | const wxPoint& pos, | |
523 | const wxSize& size, | |
524 | long style, | |
525 | const wxString& name) | |
526 | { | |
527 | wxCHECK_MSG( parent, false, wxT("can't create wxWindow without parent") ); | |
528 | ||
529 | if ( !CreateBase(parent, id, pos, size, style, wxDefaultValidator, name) ) | |
530 | return false; | |
531 | ||
532 | parent->AddChild(this); | |
533 | ||
534 | WXDWORD exstyle; | |
535 | DWORD msflags = MSWGetCreateWindowFlags(&exstyle); | |
536 | ||
537 | #ifdef __WXUNIVERSAL__ | |
538 | // no borders, we draw them ourselves | |
539 | exstyle &= ~(WS_EX_DLGMODALFRAME | | |
540 | WS_EX_STATICEDGE | | |
541 | WS_EX_CLIENTEDGE | | |
542 | WS_EX_WINDOWEDGE); | |
543 | msflags &= ~WS_BORDER; | |
544 | #endif // wxUniversal | |
545 | ||
546 | if ( IsShown() ) | |
547 | { | |
548 | msflags |= WS_VISIBLE; | |
549 | } | |
550 | ||
551 | if ( !MSWCreate(MSWGetRegisteredClassName(), | |
552 | NULL, pos, size, msflags, exstyle) ) | |
553 | return false; | |
554 | ||
555 | InheritAttributes(); | |
556 | ||
557 | return true; | |
558 | } | |
559 | ||
560 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
561 | // basic operations | |
562 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
563 | ||
564 | void wxWindowMSW::SetFocus() | |
565 | { | |
566 | HWND hWnd = GetHwnd(); | |
567 | wxCHECK_RET( hWnd, wxT("can't set focus to invalid window") ); | |
568 | ||
569 | #if !defined(__WXWINCE__) | |
570 | ::SetLastError(0); | |
571 | #endif | |
572 | ||
573 | if ( !::SetFocus(hWnd) ) | |
574 | { | |
575 | // was there really an error? | |
576 | DWORD dwRes = ::GetLastError(); | |
577 | if ( dwRes ) | |
578 | { | |
579 | HWND hwndFocus = ::GetFocus(); | |
580 | if ( hwndFocus != hWnd ) | |
581 | { | |
582 | wxLogApiError(wxT("SetFocus"), dwRes); | |
583 | } | |
584 | } | |
585 | } | |
586 | } | |
587 | ||
588 | void wxWindowMSW::SetFocusFromKbd() | |
589 | { | |
590 | // when the focus is given to the control with DLGC_HASSETSEL style from | |
591 | // keyboard its contents should be entirely selected: this is what | |
592 | // ::IsDialogMessage() does and so we should do it as well to provide the | |
593 | // same LNF as the native programs | |
594 | if ( ::SendMessage(GetHwnd(), WM_GETDLGCODE, 0, 0) & DLGC_HASSETSEL ) | |
595 | { | |
596 | ::SendMessage(GetHwnd(), EM_SETSEL, 0, -1); | |
597 | } | |
598 | ||
599 | // do this after (maybe) setting the selection as like this when | |
600 | // wxEVT_SET_FOCUS handler is called, the selection would have been already | |
601 | // set correctly -- this may be important | |
602 | wxWindowBase::SetFocusFromKbd(); | |
603 | } | |
604 | ||
605 | // Get the window with the focus | |
606 | wxWindow *wxWindowBase::DoFindFocus() | |
607 | { | |
608 | HWND hWnd = ::GetFocus(); | |
609 | if ( hWnd ) | |
610 | { | |
611 | return wxGetWindowFromHWND((WXHWND)hWnd); | |
612 | } | |
613 | ||
614 | return NULL; | |
615 | } | |
616 | ||
617 | void wxWindowMSW::DoEnable( bool enable ) | |
618 | { | |
619 | MSWEnableHWND(GetHwnd(), enable); | |
620 | } | |
621 | ||
622 | bool wxWindowMSW::MSWEnableHWND(WXHWND hWnd, bool enable) | |
623 | { | |
624 | if ( !hWnd ) | |
625 | return false; | |
626 | ||
627 | // If disabling focused control, we move focus to the next one, as if the | |
628 | // user pressed Tab. That's because we can't keep focus on a disabled | |
629 | // control, Tab-navigation would stop working then. | |
630 | if ( !enable && ::GetFocus() == hWnd ) | |
631 | Navigate(); | |
632 | ||
633 | return ::EnableWindow(hWnd, (BOOL)enable) != 0; | |
634 | } | |
635 | ||
636 | bool wxWindowMSW::Show(bool show) | |
637 | { | |
638 | if ( !wxWindowBase::Show(show) ) | |
639 | return false; | |
640 | ||
641 | HWND hWnd = GetHwnd(); | |
642 | ||
643 | // we could be called before the underlying window is created (this is | |
644 | // actually useful to prevent it from being initially shown), e.g. | |
645 | // | |
646 | // wxFoo *foo = new wxFoo; | |
647 | // foo->Hide(); | |
648 | // foo->Create(parent, ...); | |
649 | // | |
650 | // should work without errors | |
651 | if ( hWnd ) | |
652 | { | |
653 | ::ShowWindow(hWnd, show ? SW_SHOW : SW_HIDE); | |
654 | } | |
655 | ||
656 | if ( IsFrozen() ) | |
657 | { | |
658 | // DoFreeze/DoThaw don't do anything if the window is not shown, so | |
659 | // we have to call them from here now | |
660 | if ( show ) | |
661 | DoFreeze(); | |
662 | else | |
663 | DoThaw(); | |
664 | } | |
665 | ||
666 | return true; | |
667 | } | |
668 | ||
669 | bool | |
670 | wxWindowMSW::MSWShowWithEffect(bool show, | |
671 | wxShowEffect effect, | |
672 | unsigned timeout) | |
673 | { | |
674 | if ( effect == wxSHOW_EFFECT_NONE ) | |
675 | return Show(show); | |
676 | ||
677 | if ( !wxWindowBase::Show(show) ) | |
678 | return false; | |
679 | ||
680 | typedef BOOL (WINAPI *AnimateWindow_t)(HWND, DWORD, DWORD); | |
681 | ||
682 | static AnimateWindow_t s_pfnAnimateWindow = NULL; | |
683 | static bool s_initDone = false; | |
684 | if ( !s_initDone ) | |
685 | { | |
686 | wxDynamicLibrary dllUser32(wxT("user32.dll"), wxDL_VERBATIM | wxDL_QUIET); | |
687 | wxDL_INIT_FUNC(s_pfn, AnimateWindow, dllUser32); | |
688 | ||
689 | s_initDone = true; | |
690 | ||
691 | // notice that it's ok to unload user32.dll here as it won't be really | |
692 | // unloaded, being still in use because we link to it statically too | |
693 | } | |
694 | ||
695 | if ( !s_pfnAnimateWindow ) | |
696 | return Show(show); | |
697 | ||
698 | // Show() has a side effect of sending a WM_SIZE to the window, which helps | |
699 | // ensuring that it's laid out correctly, but AnimateWindow() doesn't do | |
700 | // this so send the event ourselves | |
701 | SendSizeEvent(); | |
702 | ||
703 | // prepare to use AnimateWindow() | |
704 | ||
705 | if ( !timeout ) | |
706 | timeout = 200; // this is the default animation timeout, per MSDN | |
707 | ||
708 | DWORD dwFlags = show ? 0 : AW_HIDE; | |
709 | ||
710 | switch ( effect ) | |
711 | { | |
712 | case wxSHOW_EFFECT_ROLL_TO_LEFT: | |
713 | dwFlags |= AW_HOR_NEGATIVE; | |
714 | break; | |
715 | ||
716 | case wxSHOW_EFFECT_ROLL_TO_RIGHT: | |
717 | dwFlags |= AW_HOR_POSITIVE; | |
718 | break; | |
719 | ||
720 | case wxSHOW_EFFECT_ROLL_TO_TOP: | |
721 | dwFlags |= AW_VER_NEGATIVE; | |
722 | break; | |
723 | ||
724 | case wxSHOW_EFFECT_ROLL_TO_BOTTOM: | |
725 | dwFlags |= AW_VER_POSITIVE; | |
726 | break; | |
727 | ||
728 | case wxSHOW_EFFECT_SLIDE_TO_LEFT: | |
729 | dwFlags |= AW_SLIDE | AW_HOR_NEGATIVE; | |
730 | break; | |
731 | ||
732 | case wxSHOW_EFFECT_SLIDE_TO_RIGHT: | |
733 | dwFlags |= AW_SLIDE | AW_HOR_POSITIVE; | |
734 | break; | |
735 | ||
736 | case wxSHOW_EFFECT_SLIDE_TO_TOP: | |
737 | dwFlags |= AW_SLIDE | AW_VER_NEGATIVE; | |
738 | break; | |
739 | ||
740 | case wxSHOW_EFFECT_SLIDE_TO_BOTTOM: | |
741 | dwFlags |= AW_SLIDE | AW_VER_POSITIVE; | |
742 | break; | |
743 | ||
744 | case wxSHOW_EFFECT_BLEND: | |
745 | dwFlags |= AW_BLEND; | |
746 | break; | |
747 | ||
748 | case wxSHOW_EFFECT_EXPAND: | |
749 | dwFlags |= AW_CENTER; | |
750 | break; | |
751 | ||
752 | ||
753 | case wxSHOW_EFFECT_MAX: | |
754 | wxFAIL_MSG( wxT("invalid window show effect") ); | |
755 | return false; | |
756 | ||
757 | default: | |
758 | wxFAIL_MSG( wxT("unknown window show effect") ); | |
759 | return false; | |
760 | } | |
761 | ||
762 | if ( !(*s_pfnAnimateWindow)(GetHwnd(), timeout, dwFlags) ) | |
763 | { | |
764 | wxLogLastError(wxT("AnimateWindow")); | |
765 | ||
766 | return false; | |
767 | } | |
768 | ||
769 | return true; | |
770 | } | |
771 | ||
772 | // Raise the window to the top of the Z order | |
773 | void wxWindowMSW::Raise() | |
774 | { | |
775 | wxBringWindowToTop(GetHwnd()); | |
776 | } | |
777 | ||
778 | // Lower the window to the bottom of the Z order | |
779 | void wxWindowMSW::Lower() | |
780 | { | |
781 | ::SetWindowPos(GetHwnd(), HWND_BOTTOM, 0, 0, 0, 0, | |
782 | SWP_NOMOVE | SWP_NOSIZE | SWP_NOACTIVATE); | |
783 | } | |
784 | ||
785 | void wxWindowMSW::DoCaptureMouse() | |
786 | { | |
787 | HWND hWnd = GetHwnd(); | |
788 | if ( hWnd ) | |
789 | { | |
790 | ::SetCapture(hWnd); | |
791 | } | |
792 | } | |
793 | ||
794 | void wxWindowMSW::DoReleaseMouse() | |
795 | { | |
796 | if ( !::ReleaseCapture() ) | |
797 | { | |
798 | wxLogLastError(wxT("ReleaseCapture")); | |
799 | } | |
800 | } | |
801 | ||
802 | /* static */ wxWindow *wxWindowBase::GetCapture() | |
803 | { | |
804 | HWND hwnd = ::GetCapture(); | |
805 | return hwnd ? wxFindWinFromHandle(hwnd) : NULL; | |
806 | } | |
807 | ||
808 | bool wxWindowMSW::SetFont(const wxFont& font) | |
809 | { | |
810 | if ( !wxWindowBase::SetFont(font) ) | |
811 | { | |
812 | // nothing to do | |
813 | return false; | |
814 | } | |
815 | ||
816 | HWND hWnd = GetHwnd(); | |
817 | if ( hWnd != 0 ) | |
818 | { | |
819 | // note the use of GetFont() instead of m_font: our own font could have | |
820 | // just been reset and in this case we need to change the font used by | |
821 | // the native window to the default for this class, i.e. exactly what | |
822 | // GetFont() returns | |
823 | WXHANDLE hFont = GetFont().GetResourceHandle(); | |
824 | ||
825 | wxASSERT_MSG( hFont, wxT("should have valid font") ); | |
826 | ||
827 | ::SendMessage(hWnd, WM_SETFONT, (WPARAM)hFont, MAKELPARAM(TRUE, 0)); | |
828 | } | |
829 | ||
830 | return true; | |
831 | } | |
832 | ||
833 | bool wxWindowMSW::SetCursor(const wxCursor& cursor) | |
834 | { | |
835 | if ( !wxWindowBase::SetCursor(cursor) ) | |
836 | { | |
837 | // no change | |
838 | return false; | |
839 | } | |
840 | ||
841 | // don't "overwrite" busy cursor | |
842 | if ( wxIsBusy() ) | |
843 | return true; | |
844 | ||
845 | if ( m_cursor.IsOk() ) | |
846 | { | |
847 | // normally we should change the cursor only if it's over this window | |
848 | // but we should do it always if we capture the mouse currently | |
849 | bool set = HasCapture(); | |
850 | if ( !set ) | |
851 | { | |
852 | HWND hWnd = GetHwnd(); | |
853 | ||
854 | POINT point; | |
855 | #ifdef __WXWINCE__ | |
856 | ::GetCursorPosWinCE(&point); | |
857 | #else | |
858 | ::GetCursorPos(&point); | |
859 | #endif | |
860 | ||
861 | RECT rect = wxGetWindowRect(hWnd); | |
862 | ||
863 | set = ::PtInRect(&rect, point) != 0; | |
864 | } | |
865 | ||
866 | if ( set ) | |
867 | { | |
868 | ::SetCursor(GetHcursorOf(m_cursor)); | |
869 | } | |
870 | //else: will be set later when the mouse enters this window | |
871 | } | |
872 | else // Invalid cursor: this means reset to the default one. | |
873 | { | |
874 | // To revert to the correct cursor we need to find the window currently | |
875 | // under the cursor and ask it to set its cursor itself as only it | |
876 | // knows what it is. | |
877 | POINT pt; | |
878 | if ( !::GetCursorPos(&pt) ) | |
879 | { | |
880 | wxLogLastError(wxT("GetCursorPos")); | |
881 | return false; | |
882 | } | |
883 | ||
884 | const wxWindowMSW* win = wxFindWindowAtPoint(wxPoint(pt.x, pt.y)); | |
885 | if ( !win ) | |
886 | win = this; | |
887 | ||
888 | ::SendMessage(GetHwndOf(win), WM_SETCURSOR, | |
889 | (WPARAM)GetHwndOf(win), | |
890 | MAKELPARAM(HTCLIENT, WM_MOUSEMOVE)); | |
891 | } | |
892 | ||
893 | return true; | |
894 | } | |
895 | ||
896 | void wxWindowMSW::WarpPointer(int x, int y) | |
897 | { | |
898 | ClientToScreen(&x, &y); | |
899 | ||
900 | if ( !::SetCursorPos(x, y) ) | |
901 | { | |
902 | wxLogLastError(wxT("SetCursorPos")); | |
903 | } | |
904 | } | |
905 | ||
906 | void wxWindowMSW::MSWUpdateUIState(int action, int state) | |
907 | { | |
908 | // WM_CHANGEUISTATE only appeared in Windows 2000 so it can do us no good | |
909 | // to use it on older systems -- and could possibly do some harm | |
910 | static int s_needToUpdate = -1; | |
911 | if ( s_needToUpdate == -1 ) | |
912 | { | |
913 | int verMaj, verMin; | |
914 | s_needToUpdate = wxGetOsVersion(&verMaj, &verMin) == wxOS_WINDOWS_NT && | |
915 | verMaj >= 5; | |
916 | } | |
917 | ||
918 | if ( s_needToUpdate ) | |
919 | { | |
920 | // we send WM_CHANGEUISTATE so if nothing needs changing then the system | |
921 | // won't send WM_UPDATEUISTATE | |
922 | ::SendMessage(GetHwnd(), WM_CHANGEUISTATE, MAKEWPARAM(action, state), 0); | |
923 | } | |
924 | } | |
925 | ||
926 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
927 | // scrolling stuff | |
928 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
929 | ||
930 | namespace | |
931 | { | |
932 | ||
933 | inline int GetScrollPosition(HWND hWnd, int wOrient) | |
934 | { | |
935 | #ifdef __WXMICROWIN__ | |
936 | return ::GetScrollPosWX(hWnd, wOrient); | |
937 | #else | |
938 | WinStruct<SCROLLINFO> scrollInfo; | |
939 | scrollInfo.cbSize = sizeof(SCROLLINFO); | |
940 | scrollInfo.fMask = SIF_POS; | |
941 | ::GetScrollInfo(hWnd, wOrient, &scrollInfo ); | |
942 | ||
943 | return scrollInfo.nPos; | |
944 | ||
945 | #endif | |
946 | } | |
947 | ||
948 | inline UINT WXOrientToSB(int orient) | |
949 | { | |
950 | return orient == wxHORIZONTAL ? SB_HORZ : SB_VERT; | |
951 | } | |
952 | ||
953 | } // anonymous namespace | |
954 | ||
955 | int wxWindowMSW::GetScrollPos(int orient) const | |
956 | { | |
957 | HWND hWnd = GetHwnd(); | |
958 | wxCHECK_MSG( hWnd, 0, wxT("no HWND in GetScrollPos") ); | |
959 | ||
960 | return GetScrollPosition(hWnd, WXOrientToSB(orient)); | |
961 | } | |
962 | ||
963 | // This now returns the whole range, not just the number | |
964 | // of positions that we can scroll. | |
965 | int wxWindowMSW::GetScrollRange(int orient) const | |
966 | { | |
967 | int maxPos; | |
968 | HWND hWnd = GetHwnd(); | |
969 | if ( !hWnd ) | |
970 | return 0; | |
971 | WinStruct<SCROLLINFO> scrollInfo; | |
972 | scrollInfo.fMask = SIF_RANGE; | |
973 | if ( !::GetScrollInfo(hWnd, WXOrientToSB(orient), &scrollInfo) ) | |
974 | { | |
975 | // Most of the time this is not really an error, since the return | |
976 | // value can also be zero when there is no scrollbar yet. | |
977 | // wxLogLastError(wxT("GetScrollInfo")); | |
978 | } | |
979 | maxPos = scrollInfo.nMax; | |
980 | ||
981 | // undo "range - 1" done in SetScrollbar() | |
982 | return maxPos + 1; | |
983 | } | |
984 | ||
985 | int wxWindowMSW::GetScrollThumb(int orient) const | |
986 | { | |
987 | return orient == wxHORIZONTAL ? m_xThumbSize : m_yThumbSize; | |
988 | } | |
989 | ||
990 | void wxWindowMSW::SetScrollPos(int orient, int pos, bool refresh) | |
991 | { | |
992 | HWND hWnd = GetHwnd(); | |
993 | wxCHECK_RET( hWnd, wxT("SetScrollPos: no HWND") ); | |
994 | ||
995 | WinStruct<SCROLLINFO> info; | |
996 | info.nPage = 0; | |
997 | info.nMin = 0; | |
998 | info.nPos = pos; | |
999 | info.fMask = SIF_POS; | |
1000 | if ( HasFlag(wxALWAYS_SHOW_SB) ) | |
1001 | { | |
1002 | // disable scrollbar instead of removing it then | |
1003 | info.fMask |= SIF_DISABLENOSCROLL; | |
1004 | } | |
1005 | ||
1006 | ::SetScrollInfo(hWnd, WXOrientToSB(orient), &info, refresh); | |
1007 | } | |
1008 | ||
1009 | // New function that will replace some of the above. | |
1010 | void wxWindowMSW::SetScrollbar(int orient, | |
1011 | int pos, | |
1012 | int pageSize, | |
1013 | int range, | |
1014 | bool refresh) | |
1015 | { | |
1016 | // We have to set the variables here to make them valid in events | |
1017 | // triggered by ::SetScrollInfo() | |
1018 | *(orient == wxHORIZONTAL ? &m_xThumbSize : &m_yThumbSize) = pageSize; | |
1019 | ||
1020 | HWND hwnd = GetHwnd(); | |
1021 | if ( !hwnd ) | |
1022 | return; | |
1023 | ||
1024 | WinStruct<SCROLLINFO> info; | |
1025 | if ( range != -1 ) | |
1026 | { | |
1027 | info.nPage = pageSize; | |
1028 | info.nMin = 0; // range is nMax - nMin + 1 | |
1029 | info.nMax = range - 1; // as both nMax and nMax are inclusive | |
1030 | info.nPos = pos; | |
1031 | ||
1032 | // We normally also reenable scrollbar in case it had been previously | |
1033 | // disabled by specifying SIF_DISABLENOSCROLL below but we should only | |
1034 | // do this if it has valid range, otherwise it would be enabled but not | |
1035 | // do anything. | |
1036 | if ( range >= pageSize ) | |
1037 | { | |
1038 | ::EnableScrollBar(hwnd, WXOrientToSB(orient), ESB_ENABLE_BOTH); | |
1039 | } | |
1040 | } | |
1041 | //else: leave all the fields to be 0 | |
1042 | ||
1043 | info.fMask = SIF_RANGE | SIF_PAGE | SIF_POS; | |
1044 | if ( HasFlag(wxALWAYS_SHOW_SB) || range == -1 ) | |
1045 | { | |
1046 | // disable scrollbar instead of removing it then | |
1047 | info.fMask |= SIF_DISABLENOSCROLL; | |
1048 | } | |
1049 | ||
1050 | ::SetScrollInfo(hwnd, WXOrientToSB(orient), &info, refresh); | |
1051 | } | |
1052 | ||
1053 | void wxWindowMSW::ScrollWindow(int dx, int dy, const wxRect *prect) | |
1054 | { | |
1055 | RECT rect; | |
1056 | RECT *pr; | |
1057 | if ( prect ) | |
1058 | { | |
1059 | wxCopyRectToRECT(*prect, rect); | |
1060 | pr = ▭ | |
1061 | } | |
1062 | else | |
1063 | { | |
1064 | pr = NULL; | |
1065 | ||
1066 | } | |
1067 | ||
1068 | #ifdef __WXWINCE__ | |
1069 | // FIXME: is this the exact equivalent of the line below? | |
1070 | ::ScrollWindowEx(GetHwnd(), dx, dy, pr, pr, 0, 0, SW_SCROLLCHILDREN|SW_ERASE|SW_INVALIDATE); | |
1071 | #else | |
1072 | ::ScrollWindow(GetHwnd(), dx, dy, pr, pr); | |
1073 | #endif | |
1074 | } | |
1075 | ||
1076 | static bool ScrollVertically(HWND hwnd, int kind, int count) | |
1077 | { | |
1078 | int posStart = GetScrollPosition(hwnd, SB_VERT); | |
1079 | ||
1080 | int pos = posStart; | |
1081 | for ( int n = 0; n < count; n++ ) | |
1082 | { | |
1083 | ::SendMessage(hwnd, WM_VSCROLL, kind, 0); | |
1084 | ||
1085 | int posNew = GetScrollPosition(hwnd, SB_VERT); | |
1086 | if ( posNew == pos ) | |
1087 | { | |
1088 | // don't bother to continue, we're already at top/bottom | |
1089 | break; | |
1090 | } | |
1091 | ||
1092 | pos = posNew; | |
1093 | } | |
1094 | ||
1095 | return pos != posStart; | |
1096 | } | |
1097 | ||
1098 | bool wxWindowMSW::ScrollLines(int lines) | |
1099 | { | |
1100 | bool down = lines > 0; | |
1101 | ||
1102 | return ScrollVertically(GetHwnd(), | |
1103 | down ? SB_LINEDOWN : SB_LINEUP, | |
1104 | down ? lines : -lines); | |
1105 | } | |
1106 | ||
1107 | bool wxWindowMSW::ScrollPages(int pages) | |
1108 | { | |
1109 | bool down = pages > 0; | |
1110 | ||
1111 | return ScrollVertically(GetHwnd(), | |
1112 | down ? SB_PAGEDOWN : SB_PAGEUP, | |
1113 | down ? pages : -pages); | |
1114 | } | |
1115 | ||
1116 | // ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
1117 | // RTL support | |
1118 | // ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
1119 | ||
1120 | void wxWindowMSW::SetLayoutDirection(wxLayoutDirection dir) | |
1121 | { | |
1122 | #ifdef __WXWINCE__ | |
1123 | wxUnusedVar(dir); | |
1124 | #else | |
1125 | wxCHECK_RET( GetHwnd(), | |
1126 | wxT("layout direction must be set after window creation") ); | |
1127 | ||
1128 | LONG styleOld = wxGetWindowExStyle(this); | |
1129 | ||
1130 | LONG styleNew = styleOld; | |
1131 | switch ( dir ) | |
1132 | { | |
1133 | case wxLayout_LeftToRight: | |
1134 | styleNew &= ~WS_EX_LAYOUTRTL; | |
1135 | break; | |
1136 | ||
1137 | case wxLayout_RightToLeft: | |
1138 | styleNew |= WS_EX_LAYOUTRTL; | |
1139 | break; | |
1140 | ||
1141 | default: | |
1142 | wxFAIL_MSG(wxT("unsupported layout direction")); | |
1143 | break; | |
1144 | } | |
1145 | ||
1146 | if ( styleNew != styleOld ) | |
1147 | { | |
1148 | wxSetWindowExStyle(this, styleNew); | |
1149 | } | |
1150 | #endif | |
1151 | } | |
1152 | ||
1153 | wxLayoutDirection wxWindowMSW::GetLayoutDirection() const | |
1154 | { | |
1155 | #ifdef __WXWINCE__ | |
1156 | return wxLayout_Default; | |
1157 | #else | |
1158 | wxCHECK_MSG( GetHwnd(), wxLayout_Default, wxT("invalid window") ); | |
1159 | ||
1160 | return wxHasWindowExStyle(this, WS_EX_LAYOUTRTL) ? wxLayout_RightToLeft | |
1161 | : wxLayout_LeftToRight; | |
1162 | #endif | |
1163 | } | |
1164 | ||
1165 | wxCoord | |
1166 | wxWindowMSW::AdjustForLayoutDirection(wxCoord x, | |
1167 | wxCoord WXUNUSED(width), | |
1168 | wxCoord WXUNUSED(widthTotal)) const | |
1169 | { | |
1170 | // Win32 mirrors the coordinates of RTL windows automatically, so don't | |
1171 | // redo it ourselves | |
1172 | return x; | |
1173 | } | |
1174 | ||
1175 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
1176 | // subclassing | |
1177 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
1178 | ||
1179 | void wxWindowMSW::SubclassWin(WXHWND hWnd) | |
1180 | { | |
1181 | wxASSERT_MSG( !m_oldWndProc, wxT("subclassing window twice?") ); | |
1182 | ||
1183 | HWND hwnd = (HWND)hWnd; | |
1184 | wxCHECK_RET( ::IsWindow(hwnd), wxT("invalid HWND in SubclassWin") ); | |
1185 | ||
1186 | SetHWND(hWnd); | |
1187 | ||
1188 | wxAssociateWinWithHandle(hwnd, this); | |
1189 | ||
1190 | m_oldWndProc = (WXFARPROC)wxGetWindowProc((HWND)hWnd); | |
1191 | ||
1192 | // we don't need to subclass the window of our own class (in the Windows | |
1193 | // sense of the word) | |
1194 | if ( !wxCheckWindowWndProc(hWnd, (WXFARPROC)wxWndProc) ) | |
1195 | { | |
1196 | wxSetWindowProc(hwnd, wxWndProc); | |
1197 | } | |
1198 | else | |
1199 | { | |
1200 | // don't bother restoring it either: this also makes it easy to | |
1201 | // implement IsOfStandardClass() method which returns true for the | |
1202 | // standard controls and false for the wxWidgets own windows as it can | |
1203 | // simply check m_oldWndProc | |
1204 | m_oldWndProc = NULL; | |
1205 | } | |
1206 | ||
1207 | // we're officially created now, send the event | |
1208 | wxWindowCreateEvent event((wxWindow *)this); | |
1209 | (void)HandleWindowEvent(event); | |
1210 | } | |
1211 | ||
1212 | void wxWindowMSW::UnsubclassWin() | |
1213 | { | |
1214 | wxRemoveHandleAssociation(this); | |
1215 | ||
1216 | // Restore old Window proc | |
1217 | HWND hwnd = GetHwnd(); | |
1218 | if ( hwnd ) | |
1219 | { | |
1220 | SetHWND(0); | |
1221 | ||
1222 | wxCHECK_RET( ::IsWindow(hwnd), wxT("invalid HWND in UnsubclassWin") ); | |
1223 | ||
1224 | if ( m_oldWndProc ) | |
1225 | { | |
1226 | if ( !wxCheckWindowWndProc((WXHWND)hwnd, m_oldWndProc) ) | |
1227 | { | |
1228 | wxSetWindowProc(hwnd, (WNDPROC)m_oldWndProc); | |
1229 | } | |
1230 | ||
1231 | m_oldWndProc = NULL; | |
1232 | } | |
1233 | } | |
1234 | } | |
1235 | ||
1236 | void wxWindowMSW::AssociateHandle(WXWidget handle) | |
1237 | { | |
1238 | if ( m_hWnd ) | |
1239 | { | |
1240 | if ( !::DestroyWindow(GetHwnd()) ) | |
1241 | { | |
1242 | wxLogLastError(wxT("DestroyWindow")); | |
1243 | } | |
1244 | } | |
1245 | ||
1246 | WXHWND wxhwnd = (WXHWND)handle; | |
1247 | ||
1248 | // this also calls SetHWND(wxhwnd) | |
1249 | SubclassWin(wxhwnd); | |
1250 | } | |
1251 | ||
1252 | void wxWindowMSW::DissociateHandle() | |
1253 | { | |
1254 | // this also calls SetHWND(0) for us | |
1255 | UnsubclassWin(); | |
1256 | } | |
1257 | ||
1258 | ||
1259 | bool wxCheckWindowWndProc(WXHWND hWnd, | |
1260 | WXFARPROC WXUNUSED(wndProc)) | |
1261 | { | |
1262 | const wxString str(wxGetWindowClass(hWnd)); | |
1263 | ||
1264 | // TODO: get rid of wxTLWHiddenParent special case (currently it's not | |
1265 | // registered by wxApp but using ad hoc code in msw/toplevel.cpp); | |
1266 | // there is also a hidden window class used by sockets &c | |
1267 | return wxApp::IsRegisteredClassName(str) || str == wxT("wxTLWHiddenParent"); | |
1268 | } | |
1269 | ||
1270 | // ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
1271 | // Style handling | |
1272 | // ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
1273 | ||
1274 | void wxWindowMSW::SetWindowStyleFlag(long flags) | |
1275 | { | |
1276 | long flagsOld = GetWindowStyleFlag(); | |
1277 | if ( flags == flagsOld ) | |
1278 | return; | |
1279 | ||
1280 | // update the internal variable | |
1281 | wxWindowBase::SetWindowStyleFlag(flags); | |
1282 | ||
1283 | // and the real window flags | |
1284 | MSWUpdateStyle(flagsOld, GetExtraStyle()); | |
1285 | } | |
1286 | ||
1287 | void wxWindowMSW::SetExtraStyle(long exflags) | |
1288 | { | |
1289 | long exflagsOld = GetExtraStyle(); | |
1290 | if ( exflags == exflagsOld ) | |
1291 | return; | |
1292 | ||
1293 | // update the internal variable | |
1294 | wxWindowBase::SetExtraStyle(exflags); | |
1295 | ||
1296 | // and the real window flags | |
1297 | MSWUpdateStyle(GetWindowStyleFlag(), exflagsOld); | |
1298 | } | |
1299 | ||
1300 | void wxWindowMSW::MSWUpdateStyle(long flagsOld, long exflagsOld) | |
1301 | { | |
1302 | // now update the Windows style as well if needed - and if the window had | |
1303 | // been already created | |
1304 | if ( !GetHwnd() ) | |
1305 | return; | |
1306 | ||
1307 | // we may need to call SetWindowPos() when we change some styles | |
1308 | bool callSWP = false; | |
1309 | ||
1310 | WXDWORD exstyle; | |
1311 | long style = MSWGetStyle(GetWindowStyleFlag(), &exstyle); | |
1312 | ||
1313 | // this is quite a horrible hack but we need it because MSWGetStyle() | |
1314 | // doesn't take exflags as parameter but uses GetExtraStyle() internally | |
1315 | // and so we have to modify the window exflags temporarily to get the | |
1316 | // correct exstyleOld | |
1317 | long exflagsNew = GetExtraStyle(); | |
1318 | wxWindowBase::SetExtraStyle(exflagsOld); | |
1319 | ||
1320 | WXDWORD exstyleOld; | |
1321 | long styleOld = MSWGetStyle(flagsOld, &exstyleOld); | |
1322 | ||
1323 | wxWindowBase::SetExtraStyle(exflagsNew); | |
1324 | ||
1325 | ||
1326 | if ( style != styleOld ) | |
1327 | { | |
1328 | // some flags (e.g. WS_VISIBLE or WS_DISABLED) should not be changed by | |
1329 | // this function so instead of simply setting the style to the new | |
1330 | // value we clear the bits which were set in styleOld but are set in | |
1331 | // the new one and set the ones which were not set before | |
1332 | long styleReal = ::GetWindowLong(GetHwnd(), GWL_STYLE); | |
1333 | styleReal &= ~styleOld; | |
1334 | styleReal |= style; | |
1335 | ||
1336 | ::SetWindowLong(GetHwnd(), GWL_STYLE, styleReal); | |
1337 | ||
1338 | // we need to call SetWindowPos() if any of the styles affecting the | |
1339 | // frame appearance have changed | |
1340 | callSWP = ((styleOld ^ style ) & (WS_BORDER | | |
1341 | WS_THICKFRAME | | |
1342 | WS_CAPTION | | |
1343 | WS_DLGFRAME | | |
1344 | WS_MAXIMIZEBOX | | |
1345 | WS_MINIMIZEBOX | | |
1346 | WS_SYSMENU) ) != 0; | |
1347 | } | |
1348 | ||
1349 | // and the extended style | |
1350 | long exstyleReal = wxGetWindowExStyle(this); | |
1351 | ||
1352 | if ( exstyle != exstyleOld ) | |
1353 | { | |
1354 | exstyleReal &= ~exstyleOld; | |
1355 | exstyleReal |= exstyle; | |
1356 | ||
1357 | wxSetWindowExStyle(this, exstyleReal); | |
1358 | ||
1359 | // ex style changes don't take effect without calling SetWindowPos | |
1360 | callSWP = true; | |
1361 | } | |
1362 | ||
1363 | if ( callSWP ) | |
1364 | { | |
1365 | // we must call SetWindowPos() to flush the cached extended style and | |
1366 | // also to make the change to wxSTAY_ON_TOP style take effect: just | |
1367 | // setting the style simply doesn't work | |
1368 | if ( !::SetWindowPos(GetHwnd(), | |
1369 | exstyleReal & WS_EX_TOPMOST ? HWND_TOPMOST | |
1370 | : HWND_NOTOPMOST, | |
1371 | 0, 0, 0, 0, | |
1372 | SWP_NOMOVE | SWP_NOSIZE | SWP_NOACTIVATE | | |
1373 | SWP_FRAMECHANGED) ) | |
1374 | { | |
1375 | wxLogLastError(wxT("SetWindowPos")); | |
1376 | } | |
1377 | } | |
1378 | } | |
1379 | ||
1380 | wxBorder wxWindowMSW::GetDefaultBorderForControl() const | |
1381 | { | |
1382 | return wxBORDER_THEME; | |
1383 | } | |
1384 | ||
1385 | wxBorder wxWindowMSW::GetDefaultBorder() const | |
1386 | { | |
1387 | return wxWindowBase::GetDefaultBorder(); | |
1388 | } | |
1389 | ||
1390 | // Translate wxBORDER_THEME (and other border styles if necessary) to the value | |
1391 | // that makes most sense for this Windows environment | |
1392 | wxBorder wxWindowMSW::TranslateBorder(wxBorder border) const | |
1393 | { | |
1394 | #if defined(__POCKETPC__) || defined(__SMARTPHONE__) | |
1395 | if (border == wxBORDER_THEME || border == wxBORDER_SUNKEN || border == wxBORDER_SIMPLE) | |
1396 | return wxBORDER_SIMPLE; | |
1397 | else | |
1398 | return wxBORDER_NONE; | |
1399 | #else | |
1400 | #if wxUSE_UXTHEME | |
1401 | if (border == wxBORDER_THEME) | |
1402 | { | |
1403 | if (CanApplyThemeBorder()) | |
1404 | { | |
1405 | wxUxThemeEngine* theme = wxUxThemeEngine::GetIfActive(); | |
1406 | if (theme) | |
1407 | return wxBORDER_THEME; | |
1408 | } | |
1409 | return wxBORDER_SUNKEN; | |
1410 | } | |
1411 | #endif | |
1412 | return border; | |
1413 | #endif | |
1414 | } | |
1415 | ||
1416 | ||
1417 | WXDWORD wxWindowMSW::MSWGetStyle(long flags, WXDWORD *exstyle) const | |
1418 | { | |
1419 | // translate common wxWidgets styles to Windows ones | |
1420 | ||
1421 | // most of windows are child ones, those which are not (such as | |
1422 | // wxTopLevelWindow) should remove WS_CHILD in their MSWGetStyle() | |
1423 | WXDWORD style = WS_CHILD; | |
1424 | ||
1425 | // using this flag results in very significant reduction in flicker, | |
1426 | // especially with controls inside the static boxes (as the interior of the | |
1427 | // box is not redrawn twice), but sometimes results in redraw problems, so | |
1428 | // optionally allow the old code to continue to use it provided a special | |
1429 | // system option is turned on | |
1430 | if ( !wxSystemOptions::GetOptionInt(wxT("msw.window.no-clip-children")) | |
1431 | || (flags & wxCLIP_CHILDREN) ) | |
1432 | style |= WS_CLIPCHILDREN; | |
1433 | ||
1434 | // it doesn't seem useful to use WS_CLIPSIBLINGS here as we officially | |
1435 | // don't support overlapping windows and it only makes sense for them and, | |
1436 | // presumably, gives the system some extra work (to manage more clipping | |
1437 | // regions), so avoid it alltogether | |
1438 | ||
1439 | ||
1440 | if ( flags & wxVSCROLL ) | |
1441 | style |= WS_VSCROLL; | |
1442 | ||
1443 | if ( flags & wxHSCROLL ) | |
1444 | style |= WS_HSCROLL; | |
1445 | ||
1446 | const wxBorder border = TranslateBorder(GetBorder(flags)); | |
1447 | ||
1448 | // After translation, border is now optimized for the specific version of Windows | |
1449 | // and theme engine presence. | |
1450 | ||
1451 | // WS_BORDER is only required for wxBORDER_SIMPLE | |
1452 | if ( border == wxBORDER_SIMPLE ) | |
1453 | style |= WS_BORDER; | |
1454 | ||
1455 | // now deal with ext style if the caller wants it | |
1456 | if ( exstyle ) | |
1457 | { | |
1458 | *exstyle = 0; | |
1459 | ||
1460 | #ifndef __WXWINCE__ | |
1461 | if ( flags & wxTRANSPARENT_WINDOW ) | |
1462 | *exstyle |= WS_EX_TRANSPARENT; | |
1463 | #endif | |
1464 | ||
1465 | switch ( border ) | |
1466 | { | |
1467 | default: | |
1468 | case wxBORDER_DEFAULT: | |
1469 | wxFAIL_MSG( wxT("unknown border style") ); | |
1470 | // fall through | |
1471 | ||
1472 | case wxBORDER_NONE: | |
1473 | case wxBORDER_SIMPLE: | |
1474 | case wxBORDER_THEME: | |
1475 | break; | |
1476 | ||
1477 | case wxBORDER_STATIC: | |
1478 | *exstyle |= WS_EX_STATICEDGE; | |
1479 | break; | |
1480 | ||
1481 | case wxBORDER_RAISED: | |
1482 | *exstyle |= WS_EX_DLGMODALFRAME; | |
1483 | break; | |
1484 | ||
1485 | case wxBORDER_SUNKEN: | |
1486 | *exstyle |= WS_EX_CLIENTEDGE; | |
1487 | style &= ~WS_BORDER; | |
1488 | break; | |
1489 | ||
1490 | // case wxBORDER_DOUBLE: | |
1491 | // *exstyle |= WS_EX_DLGMODALFRAME; | |
1492 | // break; | |
1493 | } | |
1494 | ||
1495 | // wxUniv doesn't use Windows dialog navigation functions at all | |
1496 | #if !defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__) && !defined(__WXWINCE__) | |
1497 | // to make the dialog navigation work with the nested panels we must | |
1498 | // use this style (top level windows such as dialogs don't need it) | |
1499 | if ( (flags & wxTAB_TRAVERSAL) && !IsTopLevel() ) | |
1500 | { | |
1501 | *exstyle |= WS_EX_CONTROLPARENT; | |
1502 | } | |
1503 | #endif // __WXUNIVERSAL__ | |
1504 | } | |
1505 | ||
1506 | return style; | |
1507 | } | |
1508 | ||
1509 | // Setup background and foreground colours correctly | |
1510 | void wxWindowMSW::SetupColours() | |
1511 | { | |
1512 | if ( GetParent() ) | |
1513 | SetBackgroundColour(GetParent()->GetBackgroundColour()); | |
1514 | } | |
1515 | ||
1516 | bool wxWindowMSW::IsMouseInWindow() const | |
1517 | { | |
1518 | // get the mouse position | |
1519 | POINT pt; | |
1520 | #ifdef __WXWINCE__ | |
1521 | ::GetCursorPosWinCE(&pt); | |
1522 | #else | |
1523 | ::GetCursorPos(&pt); | |
1524 | #endif | |
1525 | ||
1526 | // find the window which currently has the cursor and go up the window | |
1527 | // chain until we find this window - or exhaust it | |
1528 | HWND hwnd = ::WindowFromPoint(pt); | |
1529 | while ( hwnd && (hwnd != GetHwnd()) ) | |
1530 | hwnd = ::GetParent(hwnd); | |
1531 | ||
1532 | return hwnd != NULL; | |
1533 | } | |
1534 | ||
1535 | void wxWindowMSW::OnInternalIdle() | |
1536 | { | |
1537 | #ifndef HAVE_TRACKMOUSEEVENT | |
1538 | // Check if we need to send a LEAVE event | |
1539 | if ( m_mouseInWindow ) | |
1540 | { | |
1541 | // note that we should generate the leave event whether the window has | |
1542 | // or doesn't have mouse capture | |
1543 | if ( !IsMouseInWindow() ) | |
1544 | { | |
1545 | GenerateMouseLeave(); | |
1546 | } | |
1547 | } | |
1548 | #endif // !HAVE_TRACKMOUSEEVENT | |
1549 | ||
1550 | wxWindowBase::OnInternalIdle(); | |
1551 | } | |
1552 | ||
1553 | // Set this window to be the child of 'parent'. | |
1554 | bool wxWindowMSW::Reparent(wxWindowBase *parent) | |
1555 | { | |
1556 | if ( !wxWindowBase::Reparent(parent) ) | |
1557 | return false; | |
1558 | ||
1559 | HWND hWndChild = GetHwnd(); | |
1560 | HWND hWndParent = GetParent() ? GetWinHwnd(GetParent()) : (HWND)0; | |
1561 | ||
1562 | ::SetParent(hWndChild, hWndParent); | |
1563 | ||
1564 | #ifndef __WXWINCE__ | |
1565 | if ( wxHasWindowExStyle(this, WS_EX_CONTROLPARENT) ) | |
1566 | { | |
1567 | EnsureParentHasControlParentStyle(GetParent()); | |
1568 | } | |
1569 | #endif // !__WXWINCE__ | |
1570 | ||
1571 | return true; | |
1572 | } | |
1573 | ||
1574 | static inline void SendSetRedraw(HWND hwnd, bool on) | |
1575 | { | |
1576 | #ifndef __WXMICROWIN__ | |
1577 | ::SendMessage(hwnd, WM_SETREDRAW, (WPARAM)on, 0); | |
1578 | #endif | |
1579 | } | |
1580 | ||
1581 | void wxWindowMSW::DoFreeze() | |
1582 | { | |
1583 | if ( !IsShown() ) | |
1584 | return; // no point in freezing hidden window | |
1585 | ||
1586 | SendSetRedraw(GetHwnd(), false); | |
1587 | } | |
1588 | ||
1589 | void wxWindowMSW::DoThaw() | |
1590 | { | |
1591 | if ( !IsShown() ) | |
1592 | return; // hidden windows aren't frozen by DoFreeze | |
1593 | ||
1594 | SendSetRedraw(GetHwnd(), true); | |
1595 | ||
1596 | // we need to refresh everything or otherwise the invalidated area | |
1597 | // is not going to be repainted | |
1598 | Refresh(); | |
1599 | } | |
1600 | ||
1601 | void wxWindowMSW::Refresh(bool eraseBack, const wxRect *rect) | |
1602 | { | |
1603 | HWND hWnd = GetHwnd(); | |
1604 | if ( hWnd ) | |
1605 | { | |
1606 | RECT mswRect; | |
1607 | const RECT *pRect; | |
1608 | if ( rect ) | |
1609 | { | |
1610 | wxCopyRectToRECT(*rect, mswRect); | |
1611 | pRect = &mswRect; | |
1612 | } | |
1613 | else | |
1614 | { | |
1615 | pRect = NULL; | |
1616 | } | |
1617 | ||
1618 | // RedrawWindow not available on SmartPhone or eVC++ 3 | |
1619 | #if !defined(__SMARTPHONE__) && !(defined(_WIN32_WCE) && _WIN32_WCE < 400) | |
1620 | UINT flags = RDW_INVALIDATE | RDW_ALLCHILDREN; | |
1621 | if ( eraseBack ) | |
1622 | flags |= RDW_ERASE; | |
1623 | ||
1624 | ::RedrawWindow(hWnd, pRect, NULL, flags); | |
1625 | #else | |
1626 | ::InvalidateRect(hWnd, pRect, eraseBack); | |
1627 | #endif | |
1628 | } | |
1629 | } | |
1630 | ||
1631 | void wxWindowMSW::Update() | |
1632 | { | |
1633 | if ( !::UpdateWindow(GetHwnd()) ) | |
1634 | { | |
1635 | wxLogLastError(wxT("UpdateWindow")); | |
1636 | } | |
1637 | ||
1638 | #if !defined(__WXMICROWIN__) && !defined(__WXWINCE__) | |
1639 | // just calling UpdateWindow() is not enough, what we did in our WM_PAINT | |
1640 | // handler needs to be really drawn right now | |
1641 | (void)::GdiFlush(); | |
1642 | #endif // __WIN32__ | |
1643 | } | |
1644 | ||
1645 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
1646 | // drag and drop | |
1647 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
1648 | ||
1649 | #if wxUSE_DRAG_AND_DROP || !defined(__WXWINCE__) | |
1650 | ||
1651 | #if wxUSE_STATBOX | |
1652 | ||
1653 | // we need to lower the sibling static boxes so controls contained within can be | |
1654 | // a drop target | |
1655 | static void AdjustStaticBoxZOrder(wxWindow *parent) | |
1656 | { | |
1657 | // no sibling static boxes if we have no parent (ie TLW) | |
1658 | if ( !parent ) | |
1659 | return; | |
1660 | ||
1661 | for ( wxWindowList::compatibility_iterator node = parent->GetChildren().GetFirst(); | |
1662 | node; | |
1663 | node = node->GetNext() ) | |
1664 | { | |
1665 | wxStaticBox *statbox = wxDynamicCast(node->GetData(), wxStaticBox); | |
1666 | if ( statbox ) | |
1667 | { | |
1668 | ::SetWindowPos(GetHwndOf(statbox), HWND_BOTTOM, 0, 0, 0, 0, | |
1669 | SWP_NOMOVE | SWP_NOSIZE | SWP_NOACTIVATE); | |
1670 | } | |
1671 | } | |
1672 | } | |
1673 | ||
1674 | #else // !wxUSE_STATBOX | |
1675 | ||
1676 | static inline void AdjustStaticBoxZOrder(wxWindow * WXUNUSED(parent)) | |
1677 | { | |
1678 | } | |
1679 | ||
1680 | #endif // wxUSE_STATBOX/!wxUSE_STATBOX | |
1681 | ||
1682 | #endif // drag and drop is used | |
1683 | ||
1684 | #if wxUSE_DRAG_AND_DROP | |
1685 | void wxWindowMSW::SetDropTarget(wxDropTarget *pDropTarget) | |
1686 | { | |
1687 | if ( m_dropTarget != 0 ) { | |
1688 | m_dropTarget->Revoke(m_hWnd); | |
1689 | delete m_dropTarget; | |
1690 | } | |
1691 | ||
1692 | m_dropTarget = pDropTarget; | |
1693 | if ( m_dropTarget != 0 ) | |
1694 | { | |
1695 | AdjustStaticBoxZOrder(GetParent()); | |
1696 | m_dropTarget->Register(m_hWnd); | |
1697 | } | |
1698 | } | |
1699 | #endif // wxUSE_DRAG_AND_DROP | |
1700 | ||
1701 | // old-style file manager drag&drop support: we retain the old-style | |
1702 | // DragAcceptFiles in parallel with SetDropTarget. | |
1703 | void wxWindowMSW::DragAcceptFiles(bool WXUNUSED_IN_WINCE(accept)) | |
1704 | { | |
1705 | #ifndef __WXWINCE__ | |
1706 | HWND hWnd = GetHwnd(); | |
1707 | if ( hWnd ) | |
1708 | { | |
1709 | AdjustStaticBoxZOrder(GetParent()); | |
1710 | ::DragAcceptFiles(hWnd, (BOOL)accept); | |
1711 | } | |
1712 | #endif | |
1713 | } | |
1714 | ||
1715 | // ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
1716 | // tooltips | |
1717 | // ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
1718 | ||
1719 | #if wxUSE_TOOLTIPS | |
1720 | ||
1721 | void wxWindowMSW::DoSetToolTip(wxToolTip *tooltip) | |
1722 | { | |
1723 | wxWindowBase::DoSetToolTip(tooltip); | |
1724 | ||
1725 | if ( m_tooltip ) | |
1726 | m_tooltip->SetWindow((wxWindow *)this); | |
1727 | } | |
1728 | ||
1729 | #endif // wxUSE_TOOLTIPS | |
1730 | ||
1731 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
1732 | // moving and resizing | |
1733 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
1734 | ||
1735 | bool wxWindowMSW::IsSizeDeferred() const | |
1736 | { | |
1737 | #if wxUSE_DEFERRED_SIZING | |
1738 | if ( m_pendingPosition != wxDefaultPosition || | |
1739 | m_pendingSize != wxDefaultSize ) | |
1740 | return true; | |
1741 | #endif // wxUSE_DEFERRED_SIZING | |
1742 | ||
1743 | return false; | |
1744 | } | |
1745 | ||
1746 | // Get total size | |
1747 | void wxWindowMSW::DoGetSize(int *x, int *y) const | |
1748 | { | |
1749 | #if wxUSE_DEFERRED_SIZING | |
1750 | // if SetSize() had been called at wx level but not realized at Windows | |
1751 | // level yet (i.e. EndDeferWindowPos() not called), we still should return | |
1752 | // the new and not the old position to the other wx code | |
1753 | if ( m_pendingSize != wxDefaultSize ) | |
1754 | { | |
1755 | if ( x ) | |
1756 | *x = m_pendingSize.x; | |
1757 | if ( y ) | |
1758 | *y = m_pendingSize.y; | |
1759 | } | |
1760 | else // use current size | |
1761 | #endif // wxUSE_DEFERRED_SIZING | |
1762 | { | |
1763 | RECT rect = wxGetWindowRect(GetHwnd()); | |
1764 | ||
1765 | if ( x ) | |
1766 | *x = rect.right - rect.left; | |
1767 | if ( y ) | |
1768 | *y = rect.bottom - rect.top; | |
1769 | } | |
1770 | } | |
1771 | ||
1772 | // Get size *available for subwindows* i.e. excluding menu bar etc. | |
1773 | void wxWindowMSW::DoGetClientSize(int *x, int *y) const | |
1774 | { | |
1775 | #if wxUSE_DEFERRED_SIZING | |
1776 | if ( m_pendingSize != wxDefaultSize ) | |
1777 | { | |
1778 | // we need to calculate the client size corresponding to pending size | |
1779 | // | |
1780 | // FIXME: Unfortunately this doesn't work correctly for the maximized | |
1781 | // top level windows, the returned values are too small (e.g. | |
1782 | // under Windows 7 on a 1600*1200 screen with task bar on the | |
1783 | // right the pending size for a maximized window is 1538*1200 | |
1784 | // and WM_NCCALCSIZE returns 1528*1172 even though the correct | |
1785 | // client size of such window is 1538*1182). No idea how to fix | |
1786 | // it though, setting WS_MAXIMIZE in GWL_STYLE before calling | |
1787 | // WM_NCCALCSIZE doesn't help and AdjustWindowRectEx() doesn't | |
1788 | // work in this direction neither. So we just have to live with | |
1789 | // the slightly wrong results and relayout the window when it | |
1790 | // gets finally shown in its maximized state (see #11762). | |
1791 | RECT rect; | |
1792 | rect.left = m_pendingPosition.x; | |
1793 | rect.top = m_pendingPosition.y; | |
1794 | rect.right = rect.left + m_pendingSize.x; | |
1795 | rect.bottom = rect.top + m_pendingSize.y; | |
1796 | ||
1797 | ::SendMessage(GetHwnd(), WM_NCCALCSIZE, FALSE, (LPARAM)&rect); | |
1798 | ||
1799 | if ( x ) | |
1800 | *x = rect.right - rect.left; | |
1801 | if ( y ) | |
1802 | *y = rect.bottom - rect.top; | |
1803 | } | |
1804 | else | |
1805 | #endif // wxUSE_DEFERRED_SIZING | |
1806 | { | |
1807 | RECT rect = wxGetClientRect(GetHwnd()); | |
1808 | ||
1809 | if ( x ) | |
1810 | *x = rect.right; | |
1811 | if ( y ) | |
1812 | *y = rect.bottom; | |
1813 | } | |
1814 | ||
1815 | // The size of the client window can't be negative but ::GetClientRect() | |
1816 | // can return negative size for an extremely small (1x1) window with | |
1817 | // borders so ensure that we correct it here as having negative sizes is | |
1818 | // completely unexpected. | |
1819 | if ( x && *x < 0 ) | |
1820 | *x = 0; | |
1821 | if ( y && *y < 0 ) | |
1822 | *y = 0; | |
1823 | } | |
1824 | ||
1825 | void wxWindowMSW::DoGetPosition(int *x, int *y) const | |
1826 | { | |
1827 | wxWindow * const parent = GetParent(); | |
1828 | ||
1829 | wxPoint pos; | |
1830 | #if wxUSE_DEFERRED_SIZING | |
1831 | if ( m_pendingPosition != wxDefaultPosition ) | |
1832 | { | |
1833 | pos = m_pendingPosition; | |
1834 | } | |
1835 | else // use current position | |
1836 | #endif // wxUSE_DEFERRED_SIZING | |
1837 | { | |
1838 | RECT rect = wxGetWindowRect(GetHwnd()); | |
1839 | ||
1840 | POINT point; | |
1841 | point.x = rect.left; | |
1842 | point.y = rect.top; | |
1843 | ||
1844 | // we do the adjustments with respect to the parent only for the "real" | |
1845 | // children, not for the dialogs/frames | |
1846 | if ( !IsTopLevel() ) | |
1847 | { | |
1848 | if ( wxTheApp->GetLayoutDirection() == wxLayout_RightToLeft ) | |
1849 | { | |
1850 | // In RTL mode, we want the logical left x-coordinate, | |
1851 | // which would be the physical right x-coordinate. | |
1852 | point.x = rect.right; | |
1853 | } | |
1854 | ||
1855 | // Since we now have the absolute screen coords, if there's a | |
1856 | // parent we must subtract its top left corner | |
1857 | if ( parent ) | |
1858 | { | |
1859 | ::ScreenToClient(GetHwndOf(parent), &point); | |
1860 | } | |
1861 | } | |
1862 | ||
1863 | pos.x = point.x; | |
1864 | pos.y = point.y; | |
1865 | } | |
1866 | ||
1867 | // we also must adjust by the client area offset: a control which is just | |
1868 | // under a toolbar could be at (0, 30) in Windows but at (0, 0) in wx | |
1869 | if ( parent && !IsTopLevel() ) | |
1870 | { | |
1871 | const wxPoint pt(parent->GetClientAreaOrigin()); | |
1872 | pos.x -= pt.x; | |
1873 | pos.y -= pt.y; | |
1874 | } | |
1875 | ||
1876 | if ( x ) | |
1877 | *x = pos.x; | |
1878 | if ( y ) | |
1879 | *y = pos.y; | |
1880 | } | |
1881 | ||
1882 | void wxWindowMSW::DoScreenToClient(int *x, int *y) const | |
1883 | { | |
1884 | POINT pt; | |
1885 | if ( x ) | |
1886 | pt.x = *x; | |
1887 | if ( y ) | |
1888 | pt.y = *y; | |
1889 | ||
1890 | ::ScreenToClient(GetHwnd(), &pt); | |
1891 | ||
1892 | if ( x ) | |
1893 | *x = pt.x; | |
1894 | if ( y ) | |
1895 | *y = pt.y; | |
1896 | } | |
1897 | ||
1898 | void wxWindowMSW::DoClientToScreen(int *x, int *y) const | |
1899 | { | |
1900 | POINT pt; | |
1901 | if ( x ) | |
1902 | pt.x = *x; | |
1903 | if ( y ) | |
1904 | pt.y = *y; | |
1905 | ||
1906 | ::ClientToScreen(GetHwnd(), &pt); | |
1907 | ||
1908 | if ( x ) | |
1909 | *x = pt.x; | |
1910 | if ( y ) | |
1911 | *y = pt.y; | |
1912 | } | |
1913 | ||
1914 | bool | |
1915 | wxWindowMSW::DoMoveSibling(WXHWND hwnd, int x, int y, int width, int height) | |
1916 | { | |
1917 | #if wxUSE_DEFERRED_SIZING | |
1918 | // if our parent had prepared a defer window handle for us, use it (unless | |
1919 | // we are a top level window) | |
1920 | wxWindowMSW * const parent = IsTopLevel() ? NULL : GetParent(); | |
1921 | ||
1922 | HDWP hdwp = parent ? (HDWP)parent->m_hDWP : NULL; | |
1923 | if ( hdwp ) | |
1924 | { | |
1925 | hdwp = ::DeferWindowPos(hdwp, (HWND)hwnd, NULL, x, y, width, height, | |
1926 | SWP_NOZORDER | SWP_NOOWNERZORDER | SWP_NOACTIVATE); | |
1927 | if ( !hdwp ) | |
1928 | { | |
1929 | wxLogLastError(wxT("DeferWindowPos")); | |
1930 | } | |
1931 | } | |
1932 | ||
1933 | if ( parent ) | |
1934 | { | |
1935 | // hdwp must be updated as it may have been changed | |
1936 | parent->m_hDWP = (WXHANDLE)hdwp; | |
1937 | } | |
1938 | ||
1939 | if ( hdwp ) | |
1940 | { | |
1941 | // did deferred move, remember new coordinates of the window as they're | |
1942 | // different from what Windows would return for it | |
1943 | return true; | |
1944 | } | |
1945 | ||
1946 | // otherwise (or if deferring failed) move the window in place immediately | |
1947 | #endif // wxUSE_DEFERRED_SIZING | |
1948 | if ( !::MoveWindow((HWND)hwnd, x, y, width, height, IsShown()) ) | |
1949 | { | |
1950 | wxLogLastError(wxT("MoveWindow")); | |
1951 | } | |
1952 | ||
1953 | // if wxUSE_DEFERRED_SIZING, indicates that we didn't use deferred move, | |
1954 | // ignored otherwise | |
1955 | return false; | |
1956 | } | |
1957 | ||
1958 | void wxWindowMSW::DoMoveWindow(int x, int y, int width, int height) | |
1959 | { | |
1960 | // TODO: is this consistent with other platforms? | |
1961 | // Still, negative width or height shouldn't be allowed | |
1962 | if (width < 0) | |
1963 | width = 0; | |
1964 | if (height < 0) | |
1965 | height = 0; | |
1966 | ||
1967 | if ( DoMoveSibling(m_hWnd, x, y, width, height) ) | |
1968 | { | |
1969 | #if wxUSE_DEFERRED_SIZING | |
1970 | m_pendingPosition = wxPoint(x, y); | |
1971 | m_pendingSize = wxSize(width, height); | |
1972 | } | |
1973 | else // window was moved immediately, without deferring it | |
1974 | { | |
1975 | m_pendingPosition = wxDefaultPosition; | |
1976 | m_pendingSize = wxDefaultSize; | |
1977 | #endif // wxUSE_DEFERRED_SIZING | |
1978 | } | |
1979 | } | |
1980 | ||
1981 | // set the size of the window: if the dimensions are positive, just use them, | |
1982 | // but if any of them is equal to -1, it means that we must find the value for | |
1983 | // it ourselves (unless sizeFlags contains wxSIZE_ALLOW_MINUS_ONE flag, in | |
1984 | // which case -1 is a valid value for x and y) | |
1985 | // | |
1986 | // If sizeFlags contains wxSIZE_AUTO_WIDTH/HEIGHT flags (default), we calculate | |
1987 | // the width/height to best suit our contents, otherwise we reuse the current | |
1988 | // width/height | |
1989 | void wxWindowMSW::DoSetSize(int x, int y, int width, int height, int sizeFlags) | |
1990 | { | |
1991 | // get the current size and position... | |
1992 | int currentX, currentY; | |
1993 | int currentW, currentH; | |
1994 | ||
1995 | GetPosition(¤tX, ¤tY); | |
1996 | GetSize(¤tW, ¤tH); | |
1997 | ||
1998 | // ... and don't do anything (avoiding flicker) if it's already ok unless | |
1999 | // we're forced to resize the window | |
2000 | if ( x == currentX && y == currentY && | |
2001 | width == currentW && height == currentH && | |
2002 | !(sizeFlags & wxSIZE_FORCE) ) | |
2003 | { | |
2004 | if (sizeFlags & wxSIZE_FORCE_EVENT) | |
2005 | { | |
2006 | wxSizeEvent event( wxSize(width,height), GetId() ); | |
2007 | event.SetEventObject( this ); | |
2008 | HandleWindowEvent( event ); | |
2009 | } | |
2010 | return; | |
2011 | } | |
2012 | ||
2013 | if ( x == wxDefaultCoord && !(sizeFlags & wxSIZE_ALLOW_MINUS_ONE) ) | |
2014 | x = currentX; | |
2015 | if ( y == wxDefaultCoord && !(sizeFlags & wxSIZE_ALLOW_MINUS_ONE) ) | |
2016 | y = currentY; | |
2017 | ||
2018 | AdjustForParentClientOrigin(x, y, sizeFlags); | |
2019 | ||
2020 | wxSize size = wxDefaultSize; | |
2021 | if ( width == wxDefaultCoord ) | |
2022 | { | |
2023 | if ( sizeFlags & wxSIZE_AUTO_WIDTH ) | |
2024 | { | |
2025 | size = GetBestSize(); | |
2026 | width = size.x; | |
2027 | } | |
2028 | else | |
2029 | { | |
2030 | // just take the current one | |
2031 | width = currentW; | |
2032 | } | |
2033 | } | |
2034 | ||
2035 | if ( height == wxDefaultCoord ) | |
2036 | { | |
2037 | if ( sizeFlags & wxSIZE_AUTO_HEIGHT ) | |
2038 | { | |
2039 | if ( size.x == wxDefaultCoord ) | |
2040 | { | |
2041 | size = GetBestSize(); | |
2042 | } | |
2043 | //else: already called GetBestSize() above | |
2044 | ||
2045 | height = size.y; | |
2046 | } | |
2047 | else | |
2048 | { | |
2049 | // just take the current one | |
2050 | height = currentH; | |
2051 | } | |
2052 | } | |
2053 | ||
2054 | DoMoveWindow(x, y, width, height); | |
2055 | } | |
2056 | ||
2057 | void wxWindowMSW::DoSetClientSize(int width, int height) | |
2058 | { | |
2059 | // setting the client size is less obvious than it could have been | |
2060 | // because in the result of changing the total size the window scrollbar | |
2061 | // may [dis]appear and/or its menubar may [un]wrap (and AdjustWindowRect() | |
2062 | // doesn't take neither into account) and so the client size will not be | |
2063 | // correct as the difference between the total and client size changes -- | |
2064 | // so we keep changing it until we get it right | |
2065 | // | |
2066 | // normally this loop shouldn't take more than 3 iterations (usually 1 but | |
2067 | // if scrollbars [dis]appear as the result of the first call, then 2 and it | |
2068 | // may become 3 if the window had 0 size originally and so we didn't | |
2069 | // calculate the scrollbar correction correctly during the first iteration) | |
2070 | // but just to be on the safe side we check for it instead of making it an | |
2071 | // "infinite" loop (i.e. leaving break inside as the only way to get out) | |
2072 | for ( int i = 0; i < 4; i++ ) | |
2073 | { | |
2074 | RECT rectClient; | |
2075 | ::GetClientRect(GetHwnd(), &rectClient); | |
2076 | ||
2077 | // if the size is already ok, stop here (NB: rectClient.left = top = 0) | |
2078 | if ( (rectClient.right == width || width == wxDefaultCoord) && | |
2079 | (rectClient.bottom == height || height == wxDefaultCoord) ) | |
2080 | { | |
2081 | break; | |
2082 | } | |
2083 | ||
2084 | // Find the difference between the entire window (title bar and all) | |
2085 | // and the client area; add this to the new client size to move the | |
2086 | // window | |
2087 | RECT rectWin; | |
2088 | ::GetWindowRect(GetHwnd(), &rectWin); | |
2089 | ||
2090 | const int widthWin = rectWin.right - rectWin.left, | |
2091 | heightWin = rectWin.bottom - rectWin.top; | |
2092 | ||
2093 | // MoveWindow positions the child windows relative to the parent, so | |
2094 | // adjust if necessary | |
2095 | if ( !IsTopLevel() ) | |
2096 | { | |
2097 | wxWindow *parent = GetParent(); | |
2098 | if ( parent ) | |
2099 | { | |
2100 | ::ScreenToClient(GetHwndOf(parent), (POINT *)&rectWin); | |
2101 | } | |
2102 | } | |
2103 | ||
2104 | // don't call DoMoveWindow() because we want to move window immediately | |
2105 | // and not defer it here as otherwise the value returned by | |
2106 | // GetClient/WindowRect() wouldn't change as the window wouldn't be | |
2107 | // really resized | |
2108 | if ( !::MoveWindow(GetHwnd(), | |
2109 | rectWin.left, | |
2110 | rectWin.top, | |
2111 | width + widthWin - rectClient.right, | |
2112 | height + heightWin - rectClient.bottom, | |
2113 | TRUE) ) | |
2114 | { | |
2115 | wxLogLastError(wxT("MoveWindow")); | |
2116 | } | |
2117 | } | |
2118 | } | |
2119 | ||
2120 | wxSize wxWindowMSW::DoGetBorderSize() const | |
2121 | { | |
2122 | wxCoord border; | |
2123 | switch ( GetBorder() ) | |
2124 | { | |
2125 | case wxBORDER_STATIC: | |
2126 | case wxBORDER_SIMPLE: | |
2127 | border = 1; | |
2128 | break; | |
2129 | ||
2130 | case wxBORDER_SUNKEN: | |
2131 | border = 2; | |
2132 | break; | |
2133 | ||
2134 | case wxBORDER_RAISED: | |
2135 | case wxBORDER_DOUBLE: | |
2136 | border = 3; | |
2137 | break; | |
2138 | ||
2139 | default: | |
2140 | wxFAIL_MSG( wxT("unknown border style") ); | |
2141 | // fall through | |
2142 | ||
2143 | case wxBORDER_NONE: | |
2144 | border = 0; | |
2145 | } | |
2146 | ||
2147 | return 2*wxSize(border, border); | |
2148 | } | |
2149 | ||
2150 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
2151 | // text metrics | |
2152 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
2153 | ||
2154 | int wxWindowMSW::GetCharHeight() const | |
2155 | { | |
2156 | return wxGetTextMetrics(this).tmHeight; | |
2157 | } | |
2158 | ||
2159 | int wxWindowMSW::GetCharWidth() const | |
2160 | { | |
2161 | // +1 is needed because Windows apparently adds it when calculating the | |
2162 | // dialog units size in pixels | |
2163 | #if wxDIALOG_UNIT_COMPATIBILITY | |
2164 | return wxGetTextMetrics(this).tmAveCharWidth; | |
2165 | #else | |
2166 | return wxGetTextMetrics(this).tmAveCharWidth + 1; | |
2167 | #endif | |
2168 | } | |
2169 | ||
2170 | void wxWindowMSW::DoGetTextExtent(const wxString& string, | |
2171 | int *x, int *y, | |
2172 | int *descent, | |
2173 | int *externalLeading, | |
2174 | const wxFont *fontToUse) const | |
2175 | { | |
2176 | wxASSERT_MSG( !fontToUse || fontToUse->IsOk(), | |
2177 | wxT("invalid font in GetTextExtent()") ); | |
2178 | ||
2179 | HFONT hfontToUse; | |
2180 | if ( fontToUse ) | |
2181 | hfontToUse = GetHfontOf(*fontToUse); | |
2182 | else | |
2183 | hfontToUse = GetHfontOf(GetFont()); | |
2184 | ||
2185 | WindowHDC hdc(GetHwnd()); | |
2186 | SelectInHDC selectFont(hdc, hfontToUse); | |
2187 | ||
2188 | SIZE sizeRect; | |
2189 | TEXTMETRIC tm; | |
2190 | ::GetTextExtentPoint32(hdc, string.wx_str(), string.length(), &sizeRect); | |
2191 | GetTextMetrics(hdc, &tm); | |
2192 | ||
2193 | if ( x ) | |
2194 | *x = sizeRect.cx; | |
2195 | if ( y ) | |
2196 | *y = sizeRect.cy; | |
2197 | if ( descent ) | |
2198 | *descent = tm.tmDescent; | |
2199 | if ( externalLeading ) | |
2200 | *externalLeading = tm.tmExternalLeading; | |
2201 | } | |
2202 | ||
2203 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
2204 | // popup menu | |
2205 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
2206 | ||
2207 | #if wxUSE_MENUS_NATIVE | |
2208 | ||
2209 | // yield for WM_COMMAND events only, i.e. process all WM_COMMANDs in the queue | |
2210 | // immediately, without waiting for the next event loop iteration | |
2211 | // | |
2212 | // NB: this function should probably be made public later as it can almost | |
2213 | // surely replace wxYield() elsewhere as well | |
2214 | static void wxYieldForCommandsOnly() | |
2215 | { | |
2216 | // peek all WM_COMMANDs (it will always return WM_QUIT too but we don't | |
2217 | // want to process it here) | |
2218 | MSG msg; | |
2219 | while ( ::PeekMessage(&msg, (HWND)0, WM_COMMAND, WM_COMMAND, PM_REMOVE) ) | |
2220 | { | |
2221 | if ( msg.message == WM_QUIT ) | |
2222 | { | |
2223 | // if we retrieved a WM_QUIT, insert back into the message queue. | |
2224 | ::PostQuitMessage(0); | |
2225 | break; | |
2226 | } | |
2227 | ||
2228 | // luckily (as we don't have access to wxEventLoopImpl method from here | |
2229 | // anyhow...) we don't need to pre process WM_COMMANDs so dispatch it | |
2230 | // immediately | |
2231 | ::TranslateMessage(&msg); | |
2232 | ::DispatchMessage(&msg); | |
2233 | } | |
2234 | } | |
2235 | ||
2236 | bool wxWindowMSW::DoPopupMenu(wxMenu *menu, int x, int y) | |
2237 | { | |
2238 | menu->UpdateUI(); | |
2239 | ||
2240 | wxPoint pt; | |
2241 | if ( x == wxDefaultCoord && y == wxDefaultCoord ) | |
2242 | { | |
2243 | pt = wxGetMousePosition(); | |
2244 | } | |
2245 | else | |
2246 | { | |
2247 | pt = ClientToScreen(wxPoint(x, y)); | |
2248 | } | |
2249 | ||
2250 | #if defined(__WXWINCE__) | |
2251 | static const UINT flags = 0; | |
2252 | #else // !__WXWINCE__ | |
2253 | UINT flags = TPM_RIGHTBUTTON; | |
2254 | // NT4 doesn't support TPM_RECURSE and simply doesn't show the menu at all | |
2255 | // when it's use, I'm not sure about Win95/98 but prefer to err on the safe | |
2256 | // side and not to use it there neither -- modify the test if it does work | |
2257 | // on these systems | |
2258 | if ( wxGetWinVersion() >= wxWinVersion_5 ) | |
2259 | { | |
2260 | // using TPM_RECURSE allows us to show a popup menu while another menu | |
2261 | // is opened which can be useful and is supported by the other | |
2262 | // platforms, so allow it under Windows too | |
2263 | flags |= TPM_RECURSE; | |
2264 | } | |
2265 | #endif // __WXWINCE__/!__WXWINCE__ | |
2266 | ||
2267 | ::TrackPopupMenu(GetHmenuOf(menu), flags, pt.x, pt.y, 0, GetHwnd(), NULL); | |
2268 | ||
2269 | // we need to do it right now as otherwise the events are never going to be | |
2270 | // sent to wxCurrentPopupMenu from HandleCommand() | |
2271 | // | |
2272 | // note that even eliminating (ugly) wxCurrentPopupMenu global wouldn't | |
2273 | // help and we'd still need wxYieldForCommandsOnly() as the menu may be | |
2274 | // destroyed as soon as we return (it can be a local variable in the caller | |
2275 | // for example) and so we do need to process the event immediately | |
2276 | wxYieldForCommandsOnly(); | |
2277 | ||
2278 | return true; | |
2279 | } | |
2280 | ||
2281 | #endif // wxUSE_MENUS_NATIVE | |
2282 | ||
2283 | // =========================================================================== | |
2284 | // pre/post message processing | |
2285 | // =========================================================================== | |
2286 | ||
2287 | WXLRESULT wxWindowMSW::MSWDefWindowProc(WXUINT nMsg, WXWPARAM wParam, WXLPARAM lParam) | |
2288 | { | |
2289 | WXLRESULT rc; | |
2290 | if ( m_oldWndProc ) | |
2291 | rc = ::CallWindowProc(CASTWNDPROC m_oldWndProc, GetHwnd(), (UINT) nMsg, (WPARAM) wParam, (LPARAM) lParam); | |
2292 | else | |
2293 | rc = ::DefWindowProc(GetHwnd(), nMsg, wParam, lParam); | |
2294 | ||
2295 | // Special hack used by wxTextEntry auto-completion only: this event is | |
2296 | // sent after the normal keyboard processing so that its handler could use | |
2297 | // the updated contents of the text control, after taking the key that was | |
2298 | // pressed into account. | |
2299 | if ( nMsg == WM_CHAR ) | |
2300 | { | |
2301 | wxKeyEvent event(CreateCharEvent(wxEVT_AFTER_CHAR, wParam, lParam)); | |
2302 | HandleWindowEvent(event); | |
2303 | } | |
2304 | ||
2305 | return rc; | |
2306 | } | |
2307 | ||
2308 | bool wxWindowMSW::MSWProcessMessage(WXMSG* pMsg) | |
2309 | { | |
2310 | // wxUniversal implements tab traversal itself | |
2311 | #ifndef __WXUNIVERSAL__ | |
2312 | if ( m_hWnd != 0 && (GetWindowStyleFlag() & wxTAB_TRAVERSAL) ) | |
2313 | { | |
2314 | // intercept dialog navigation keys | |
2315 | MSG *msg = (MSG *)pMsg; | |
2316 | ||
2317 | // here we try to do all the job which ::IsDialogMessage() usually does | |
2318 | // internally | |
2319 | if ( msg->message == WM_KEYDOWN ) | |
2320 | { | |
2321 | bool bCtrlDown = wxIsCtrlDown(); | |
2322 | bool bShiftDown = wxIsShiftDown(); | |
2323 | ||
2324 | // WM_GETDLGCODE: ask the control if it wants the key for itself, | |
2325 | // don't process it if it's the case (except for Ctrl-Tab/Enter | |
2326 | // combinations which are always processed) | |
2327 | LONG lDlgCode = ::SendMessage(msg->hwnd, WM_GETDLGCODE, 0, 0); | |
2328 | ||
2329 | // surprisingly, DLGC_WANTALLKEYS bit mask doesn't contain the | |
2330 | // DLGC_WANTTAB nor DLGC_WANTARROWS bits although, logically, | |
2331 | // it, of course, implies them | |
2332 | if ( lDlgCode & DLGC_WANTALLKEYS ) | |
2333 | { | |
2334 | lDlgCode |= DLGC_WANTTAB | DLGC_WANTARROWS; | |
2335 | } | |
2336 | ||
2337 | bool bForward = true, | |
2338 | bWindowChange = false, | |
2339 | bFromTab = false; | |
2340 | ||
2341 | // should we process this message specially? | |
2342 | bool bProcess = true; | |
2343 | switch ( msg->wParam ) | |
2344 | { | |
2345 | case VK_TAB: | |
2346 | if ( (lDlgCode & DLGC_WANTTAB) && !bCtrlDown ) | |
2347 | { | |
2348 | // let the control have the TAB | |
2349 | bProcess = false; | |
2350 | } | |
2351 | else // use it for navigation | |
2352 | { | |
2353 | // Ctrl-Tab cycles thru notebook pages | |
2354 | bWindowChange = bCtrlDown; | |
2355 | bForward = !bShiftDown; | |
2356 | bFromTab = true; | |
2357 | } | |
2358 | break; | |
2359 | ||
2360 | case VK_UP: | |
2361 | case VK_LEFT: | |
2362 | if ( (lDlgCode & DLGC_WANTARROWS) || bCtrlDown ) | |
2363 | bProcess = false; | |
2364 | else | |
2365 | bForward = false; | |
2366 | break; | |
2367 | ||
2368 | case VK_DOWN: | |
2369 | case VK_RIGHT: | |
2370 | if ( (lDlgCode & DLGC_WANTARROWS) || bCtrlDown ) | |
2371 | bProcess = false; | |
2372 | break; | |
2373 | ||
2374 | case VK_PRIOR: | |
2375 | bForward = false; | |
2376 | // fall through | |
2377 | ||
2378 | case VK_NEXT: | |
2379 | // we treat PageUp/Dn as arrows because chances are that | |
2380 | // a control which needs arrows also needs them for | |
2381 | // navigation (e.g. wxTextCtrl, wxListCtrl, ...) | |
2382 | if ( (lDlgCode & DLGC_WANTARROWS) && !bCtrlDown ) | |
2383 | bProcess = false; | |
2384 | else // OTOH Ctrl-PageUp/Dn works as [Shift-]Ctrl-Tab | |
2385 | bWindowChange = true; | |
2386 | break; | |
2387 | ||
2388 | case VK_RETURN: | |
2389 | { | |
2390 | #if wxUSE_BUTTON | |
2391 | // currently active button should get enter press even | |
2392 | // if there is a default button elsewhere so check if | |
2393 | // this window is a button first | |
2394 | wxWindow *btn = NULL; | |
2395 | if ( lDlgCode & DLGC_DEFPUSHBUTTON ) | |
2396 | { | |
2397 | // let IsDialogMessage() handle this for all | |
2398 | // buttons except the owner-drawn ones which it | |
2399 | // just seems to ignore | |
2400 | long style = ::GetWindowLong(msg->hwnd, GWL_STYLE); | |
2401 | if ( (style & BS_OWNERDRAW) == BS_OWNERDRAW ) | |
2402 | { | |
2403 | // emulate the button click | |
2404 | btn = wxFindWinFromHandle(msg->hwnd); | |
2405 | } | |
2406 | } | |
2407 | else // not a button itself, do we have default button? | |
2408 | { | |
2409 | // check if this window or any of its ancestors | |
2410 | // wants the message for itself (we always reserve | |
2411 | // Ctrl-Enter for dialog navigation though) | |
2412 | wxWindow *win = this; | |
2413 | if ( !bCtrlDown ) | |
2414 | { | |
2415 | // this will contain the dialog code of this | |
2416 | // window and all of its parent windows in turn | |
2417 | LONG lDlgCode2 = lDlgCode; | |
2418 | ||
2419 | while ( win ) | |
2420 | { | |
2421 | if ( lDlgCode2 & DLGC_WANTMESSAGE ) | |
2422 | { | |
2423 | // as it wants to process Enter itself, | |
2424 | // don't call IsDialogMessage() which | |
2425 | // would consume it | |
2426 | return false; | |
2427 | } | |
2428 | ||
2429 | // don't propagate keyboard messages beyond | |
2430 | // the first top level window parent | |
2431 | if ( win->IsTopLevel() ) | |
2432 | break; | |
2433 | ||
2434 | win = win->GetParent(); | |
2435 | ||
2436 | lDlgCode2 = ::SendMessage | |
2437 | ( | |
2438 | GetHwndOf(win), | |
2439 | WM_GETDLGCODE, | |
2440 | 0, | |
2441 | 0 | |
2442 | ); | |
2443 | } | |
2444 | } | |
2445 | else // bCtrlDown | |
2446 | { | |
2447 | win = wxGetTopLevelParent(win); | |
2448 | } | |
2449 | ||
2450 | wxTopLevelWindow * const | |
2451 | tlw = wxDynamicCast(win, wxTopLevelWindow); | |
2452 | if ( tlw ) | |
2453 | { | |
2454 | btn = wxDynamicCast(tlw->GetDefaultItem(), | |
2455 | wxButton); | |
2456 | } | |
2457 | } | |
2458 | ||
2459 | if ( btn && btn->IsEnabled() ) | |
2460 | { | |
2461 | btn->MSWCommand(BN_CLICKED, 0 /* unused */); | |
2462 | return true; | |
2463 | } | |
2464 | ||
2465 | // This "Return" key press won't be actually used for | |
2466 | // navigation so don't generate wxNavigationKeyEvent | |
2467 | // for it but still pass it to IsDialogMessage() as it | |
2468 | // may handle it in some other way (e.g. by playing the | |
2469 | // default error sound). | |
2470 | bProcess = false; | |
2471 | ||
2472 | #endif // wxUSE_BUTTON | |
2473 | ||
2474 | #ifdef __WXWINCE__ | |
2475 | // map Enter presses into button presses on PDAs | |
2476 | wxJoystickEvent event(wxEVT_JOY_BUTTON_DOWN); | |
2477 | event.SetEventObject(this); | |
2478 | if ( HandleWindowEvent(event) ) | |
2479 | return true; | |
2480 | #endif // __WXWINCE__ | |
2481 | } | |
2482 | break; | |
2483 | ||
2484 | default: | |
2485 | bProcess = false; | |
2486 | } | |
2487 | ||
2488 | if ( bProcess ) | |
2489 | { | |
2490 | wxNavigationKeyEvent event; | |
2491 | event.SetDirection(bForward); | |
2492 | event.SetWindowChange(bWindowChange); | |
2493 | event.SetFromTab(bFromTab); | |
2494 | event.SetEventObject(this); | |
2495 | ||
2496 | if ( HandleWindowEvent(event) ) | |
2497 | { | |
2498 | // as we don't call IsDialogMessage(), which would take of | |
2499 | // this by default, we need to manually send this message | |
2500 | // so that controls can change their UI state if needed | |
2501 | MSWUpdateUIState(UIS_CLEAR, UISF_HIDEFOCUS); | |
2502 | ||
2503 | return true; | |
2504 | } | |
2505 | } | |
2506 | } | |
2507 | ||
2508 | if ( ::IsDialogMessage(GetHwnd(), msg) ) | |
2509 | { | |
2510 | // IsDialogMessage() did something... | |
2511 | return true; | |
2512 | } | |
2513 | } | |
2514 | #endif // __WXUNIVERSAL__ | |
2515 | ||
2516 | #if wxUSE_TOOLTIPS | |
2517 | if ( m_tooltip ) | |
2518 | { | |
2519 | // relay mouse move events to the tooltip control | |
2520 | MSG *msg = (MSG *)pMsg; | |
2521 | if ( msg->message == WM_MOUSEMOVE ) | |
2522 | wxToolTip::RelayEvent(pMsg); | |
2523 | } | |
2524 | #endif // wxUSE_TOOLTIPS | |
2525 | ||
2526 | return false; | |
2527 | } | |
2528 | ||
2529 | bool wxWindowMSW::MSWTranslateMessage(WXMSG* pMsg) | |
2530 | { | |
2531 | #if wxUSE_ACCEL && !defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__) | |
2532 | return m_acceleratorTable.Translate(this, pMsg); | |
2533 | #else | |
2534 | (void) pMsg; | |
2535 | return false; | |
2536 | #endif // wxUSE_ACCEL | |
2537 | } | |
2538 | ||
2539 | bool wxWindowMSW::MSWShouldPreProcessMessage(WXMSG* msg) | |
2540 | { | |
2541 | // all tests below have to deal with various bugs/misfeatures of | |
2542 | // IsDialogMessage(): we have to prevent it from being called from our | |
2543 | // MSWProcessMessage() in some situations | |
2544 | ||
2545 | // don't let IsDialogMessage() get VK_ESCAPE as it _always_ eats the | |
2546 | // message even when there is no cancel button and when the message is | |
2547 | // needed by the control itself: in particular, it prevents the tree in | |
2548 | // place edit control from being closed with Escape in a dialog | |
2549 | if ( msg->message == WM_KEYDOWN && msg->wParam == VK_ESCAPE ) | |
2550 | { | |
2551 | return false; | |
2552 | } | |
2553 | ||
2554 | // ::IsDialogMessage() is broken and may sometimes hang the application by | |
2555 | // going into an infinite loop when it tries to find the control to give | |
2556 | // focus to when Alt-<key> is pressed, so we try to detect [some of] the | |
2557 | // situations when this may happen and not call it then | |
2558 | if ( msg->message != WM_SYSCHAR ) | |
2559 | return true; | |
2560 | ||
2561 | // assume we can call it by default | |
2562 | bool canSafelyCallIsDlgMsg = true; | |
2563 | ||
2564 | HWND hwndFocus = ::GetFocus(); | |
2565 | ||
2566 | // if the currently focused window itself has WS_EX_CONTROLPARENT style, | |
2567 | // ::IsDialogMessage() will also enter an infinite loop, because it will | |
2568 | // recursively check the child windows but not the window itself and so if | |
2569 | // none of the children accepts focus it loops forever (as it only stops | |
2570 | // when it gets back to the window it started from) | |
2571 | // | |
2572 | // while it is very unusual that a window with WS_EX_CONTROLPARENT | |
2573 | // style has the focus, it can happen. One such possibility is if | |
2574 | // all windows are either toplevel, wxDialog, wxPanel or static | |
2575 | // controls and no window can actually accept keyboard input. | |
2576 | #if !defined(__WXWINCE__) | |
2577 | if ( ::GetWindowLong(hwndFocus, GWL_EXSTYLE) & WS_EX_CONTROLPARENT ) | |
2578 | { | |
2579 | // pessimistic by default | |
2580 | canSafelyCallIsDlgMsg = false; | |
2581 | for ( wxWindowList::compatibility_iterator node = GetChildren().GetFirst(); | |
2582 | node; | |
2583 | node = node->GetNext() ) | |
2584 | { | |
2585 | wxWindow * const win = node->GetData(); | |
2586 | if ( win->CanAcceptFocus() && | |
2587 | !wxHasWindowExStyle(win, WS_EX_CONTROLPARENT) ) | |
2588 | { | |
2589 | // it shouldn't hang... | |
2590 | canSafelyCallIsDlgMsg = true; | |
2591 | ||
2592 | break; | |
2593 | } | |
2594 | } | |
2595 | } | |
2596 | #endif // !__WXWINCE__ | |
2597 | ||
2598 | if ( canSafelyCallIsDlgMsg ) | |
2599 | { | |
2600 | // ::IsDialogMessage() can enter in an infinite loop when the | |
2601 | // currently focused window is disabled or hidden and its | |
2602 | // parent has WS_EX_CONTROLPARENT style, so don't call it in | |
2603 | // this case | |
2604 | while ( hwndFocus ) | |
2605 | { | |
2606 | if ( !::IsWindowEnabled(hwndFocus) || | |
2607 | !::IsWindowVisible(hwndFocus) ) | |
2608 | { | |
2609 | // it would enter an infinite loop if we do this! | |
2610 | canSafelyCallIsDlgMsg = false; | |
2611 | ||
2612 | break; | |
2613 | } | |
2614 | ||
2615 | if ( !(::GetWindowLong(hwndFocus, GWL_STYLE) & WS_CHILD) ) | |
2616 | { | |
2617 | // it's a top level window, don't go further -- e.g. even | |
2618 | // if the parent of a dialog is disabled, this doesn't | |
2619 | // break navigation inside the dialog | |
2620 | break; | |
2621 | } | |
2622 | ||
2623 | hwndFocus = ::GetParent(hwndFocus); | |
2624 | } | |
2625 | } | |
2626 | ||
2627 | return canSafelyCallIsDlgMsg; | |
2628 | } | |
2629 | ||
2630 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
2631 | // message params unpackers | |
2632 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
2633 | ||
2634 | void wxWindowMSW::UnpackCommand(WXWPARAM wParam, WXLPARAM lParam, | |
2635 | WORD *id, WXHWND *hwnd, WORD *cmd) | |
2636 | { | |
2637 | *id = LOWORD(wParam); | |
2638 | *hwnd = (WXHWND)lParam; | |
2639 | *cmd = HIWORD(wParam); | |
2640 | } | |
2641 | ||
2642 | void wxWindowMSW::UnpackActivate(WXWPARAM wParam, WXLPARAM lParam, | |
2643 | WXWORD *state, WXWORD *minimized, WXHWND *hwnd) | |
2644 | { | |
2645 | *state = LOWORD(wParam); | |
2646 | *minimized = HIWORD(wParam); | |
2647 | *hwnd = (WXHWND)lParam; | |
2648 | } | |
2649 | ||
2650 | void wxWindowMSW::UnpackScroll(WXWPARAM wParam, WXLPARAM lParam, | |
2651 | WXWORD *code, WXWORD *pos, WXHWND *hwnd) | |
2652 | { | |
2653 | *code = LOWORD(wParam); | |
2654 | *pos = HIWORD(wParam); | |
2655 | *hwnd = (WXHWND)lParam; | |
2656 | } | |
2657 | ||
2658 | void wxWindowMSW::UnpackCtlColor(WXWPARAM wParam, WXLPARAM lParam, | |
2659 | WXHDC *hdc, WXHWND *hwnd) | |
2660 | { | |
2661 | *hwnd = (WXHWND)lParam; | |
2662 | *hdc = (WXHDC)wParam; | |
2663 | } | |
2664 | ||
2665 | void wxWindowMSW::UnpackMenuSelect(WXWPARAM wParam, WXLPARAM lParam, | |
2666 | WXWORD *item, WXWORD *flags, WXHMENU *hmenu) | |
2667 | { | |
2668 | *item = (WXWORD)wParam; | |
2669 | *flags = HIWORD(wParam); | |
2670 | *hmenu = (WXHMENU)lParam; | |
2671 | } | |
2672 | ||
2673 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
2674 | // Main wxWidgets window proc and the window proc for wxWindow | |
2675 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
2676 | ||
2677 | // Hook for new window just as it's being created, when the window isn't yet | |
2678 | // associated with the handle | |
2679 | static wxWindowMSW *gs_winBeingCreated = NULL; | |
2680 | ||
2681 | // implementation of wxWindowCreationHook class: it just sets gs_winBeingCreated to the | |
2682 | // window being created and insures that it's always unset back later | |
2683 | wxWindowCreationHook::wxWindowCreationHook(wxWindowMSW *winBeingCreated) | |
2684 | { | |
2685 | gs_winBeingCreated = winBeingCreated; | |
2686 | } | |
2687 | ||
2688 | wxWindowCreationHook::~wxWindowCreationHook() | |
2689 | { | |
2690 | gs_winBeingCreated = NULL; | |
2691 | } | |
2692 | ||
2693 | // Main window proc | |
2694 | LRESULT WXDLLEXPORT APIENTRY _EXPORT wxWndProc(HWND hWnd, UINT message, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam) | |
2695 | { | |
2696 | // trace all messages: useful for the debugging but noticeably slows down | |
2697 | // the code so don't do it by default | |
2698 | #if wxDEBUG_LEVEL >= 2 | |
2699 | // notice that we cast wParam and lParam to long to avoid mismatch with | |
2700 | // format specifiers in 64 bit builds where they are both int64 quantities | |
2701 | // | |
2702 | // casting like this loses information, of course, but it shouldn't matter | |
2703 | // much for this diagnostic code and it keeps the code simple | |
2704 | wxLogTrace("winmsg", | |
2705 | wxT("Processing %s(hWnd=%p, wParam=%08lx, lParam=%08lx)"), | |
2706 | wxGetMessageName(message), hWnd, (long)wParam, (long)lParam); | |
2707 | #endif // wxDEBUG_LEVEL >= 2 | |
2708 | ||
2709 | wxWindowMSW *wnd = wxFindWinFromHandle(hWnd); | |
2710 | ||
2711 | // when we get the first message for the HWND we just created, we associate | |
2712 | // it with wxWindow stored in gs_winBeingCreated | |
2713 | if ( !wnd && gs_winBeingCreated ) | |
2714 | { | |
2715 | wxAssociateWinWithHandle(hWnd, gs_winBeingCreated); | |
2716 | wnd = gs_winBeingCreated; | |
2717 | gs_winBeingCreated = NULL; | |
2718 | wnd->SetHWND((WXHWND)hWnd); | |
2719 | } | |
2720 | ||
2721 | LRESULT rc; | |
2722 | ||
2723 | if ( wnd && wxGUIEventLoop::AllowProcessing(wnd) ) | |
2724 | rc = wnd->MSWWindowProc(message, wParam, lParam); | |
2725 | else | |
2726 | rc = ::DefWindowProc(hWnd, message, wParam, lParam); | |
2727 | ||
2728 | return rc; | |
2729 | } | |
2730 | ||
2731 | bool | |
2732 | wxWindowMSW::MSWHandleMessage(WXLRESULT *result, | |
2733 | WXUINT message, | |
2734 | WXWPARAM wParam, | |
2735 | WXLPARAM lParam) | |
2736 | { | |
2737 | // did we process the message? | |
2738 | bool processed = false; | |
2739 | ||
2740 | // the return value | |
2741 | union | |
2742 | { | |
2743 | bool allow; | |
2744 | WXLRESULT result; | |
2745 | WXHBRUSH hBrush; | |
2746 | } rc; | |
2747 | ||
2748 | // for most messages we should return 0 when we do process the message | |
2749 | rc.result = 0; | |
2750 | ||
2751 | switch ( message ) | |
2752 | { | |
2753 | case WM_CREATE: | |
2754 | { | |
2755 | bool mayCreate; | |
2756 | processed = HandleCreate((WXLPCREATESTRUCT)lParam, &mayCreate); | |
2757 | if ( processed ) | |
2758 | { | |
2759 | // return 0 to allow window creation | |
2760 | rc.result = mayCreate ? 0 : -1; | |
2761 | } | |
2762 | } | |
2763 | break; | |
2764 | ||
2765 | case WM_DESTROY: | |
2766 | // never set processed to true and *always* pass WM_DESTROY to | |
2767 | // DefWindowProc() as Windows may do some internal cleanup when | |
2768 | // processing it and failing to pass the message along may cause | |
2769 | // memory and resource leaks! | |
2770 | (void)HandleDestroy(); | |
2771 | break; | |
2772 | ||
2773 | case WM_SIZE: | |
2774 | processed = HandleSize(LOWORD(lParam), HIWORD(lParam), wParam); | |
2775 | break; | |
2776 | ||
2777 | case WM_MOVE: | |
2778 | processed = HandleMove(GET_X_LPARAM(lParam), GET_Y_LPARAM(lParam)); | |
2779 | break; | |
2780 | ||
2781 | #if !defined(__WXWINCE__) | |
2782 | case WM_MOVING: | |
2783 | { | |
2784 | LPRECT pRect = (LPRECT)lParam; | |
2785 | wxRect rc; | |
2786 | rc.SetLeft(pRect->left); | |
2787 | rc.SetTop(pRect->top); | |
2788 | rc.SetRight(pRect->right); | |
2789 | rc.SetBottom(pRect->bottom); | |
2790 | processed = HandleMoving(rc); | |
2791 | if (processed) { | |
2792 | pRect->left = rc.GetLeft(); | |
2793 | pRect->top = rc.GetTop(); | |
2794 | pRect->right = rc.GetRight(); | |
2795 | pRect->bottom = rc.GetBottom(); | |
2796 | } | |
2797 | } | |
2798 | break; | |
2799 | ||
2800 | case WM_ENTERSIZEMOVE: | |
2801 | { | |
2802 | processed = HandleEnterSizeMove(); | |
2803 | } | |
2804 | break; | |
2805 | ||
2806 | case WM_EXITSIZEMOVE: | |
2807 | { | |
2808 | processed = HandleExitSizeMove(); | |
2809 | } | |
2810 | break; | |
2811 | ||
2812 | case WM_SIZING: | |
2813 | { | |
2814 | LPRECT pRect = (LPRECT)lParam; | |
2815 | wxRect rc; | |
2816 | rc.SetLeft(pRect->left); | |
2817 | rc.SetTop(pRect->top); | |
2818 | rc.SetRight(pRect->right); | |
2819 | rc.SetBottom(pRect->bottom); | |
2820 | processed = HandleSizing(rc); | |
2821 | if (processed) { | |
2822 | pRect->left = rc.GetLeft(); | |
2823 | pRect->top = rc.GetTop(); | |
2824 | pRect->right = rc.GetRight(); | |
2825 | pRect->bottom = rc.GetBottom(); | |
2826 | } | |
2827 | } | |
2828 | break; | |
2829 | #endif // !__WXWINCE__ | |
2830 | ||
2831 | #if !defined(__WXMICROWIN__) && !defined(__WXWINCE__) | |
2832 | case WM_ACTIVATEAPP: | |
2833 | // This implicitly sends a wxEVT_ACTIVATE_APP event | |
2834 | wxTheApp->SetActive(wParam != 0, FindFocus()); | |
2835 | break; | |
2836 | #endif | |
2837 | ||
2838 | case WM_ACTIVATE: | |
2839 | { | |
2840 | WXWORD state, minimized; | |
2841 | WXHWND hwnd; | |
2842 | UnpackActivate(wParam, lParam, &state, &minimized, &hwnd); | |
2843 | ||
2844 | processed = HandleActivate(state, minimized != 0, (WXHWND)hwnd); | |
2845 | } | |
2846 | break; | |
2847 | ||
2848 | case WM_SETFOCUS: | |
2849 | processed = HandleSetFocus((WXHWND)wParam); | |
2850 | break; | |
2851 | ||
2852 | case WM_KILLFOCUS: | |
2853 | processed = HandleKillFocus((WXHWND)wParam); | |
2854 | break; | |
2855 | ||
2856 | case WM_PRINTCLIENT: | |
2857 | processed = HandlePrintClient((WXHDC)wParam); | |
2858 | break; | |
2859 | ||
2860 | case WM_PAINT: | |
2861 | if ( wParam ) | |
2862 | { | |
2863 | wxPaintDCEx dc((wxWindow *)this, (WXHDC)wParam); | |
2864 | ||
2865 | processed = HandlePaint(); | |
2866 | } | |
2867 | else // no DC given | |
2868 | { | |
2869 | processed = HandlePaint(); | |
2870 | } | |
2871 | break; | |
2872 | ||
2873 | case WM_CLOSE: | |
2874 | #ifdef __WXUNIVERSAL__ | |
2875 | // Universal uses its own wxFrame/wxDialog, so we don't receive | |
2876 | // close events unless we have this. | |
2877 | Close(); | |
2878 | #endif // __WXUNIVERSAL__ | |
2879 | ||
2880 | // don't let the DefWindowProc() destroy our window - we'll do it | |
2881 | // ourselves in ~wxWindow | |
2882 | processed = true; | |
2883 | rc.result = TRUE; | |
2884 | break; | |
2885 | ||
2886 | case WM_SHOWWINDOW: | |
2887 | processed = HandleShow(wParam != 0, (int)lParam); | |
2888 | break; | |
2889 | ||
2890 | case WM_MOUSEMOVE: | |
2891 | processed = HandleMouseMove(GET_X_LPARAM(lParam), | |
2892 | GET_Y_LPARAM(lParam), | |
2893 | wParam); | |
2894 | break; | |
2895 | ||
2896 | #ifdef HAVE_TRACKMOUSEEVENT | |
2897 | case WM_MOUSELEAVE: | |
2898 | // filter out excess WM_MOUSELEAVE events sent after PopupMenu() | |
2899 | // (on XP at least) | |
2900 | if ( m_mouseInWindow ) | |
2901 | { | |
2902 | GenerateMouseLeave(); | |
2903 | } | |
2904 | ||
2905 | // always pass processed back as false, this allows the window | |
2906 | // manager to process the message too. This is needed to | |
2907 | // ensure windows XP themes work properly as the mouse moves | |
2908 | // over widgets like buttons. So don't set processed to true here. | |
2909 | break; | |
2910 | #endif // HAVE_TRACKMOUSEEVENT | |
2911 | ||
2912 | #if wxUSE_MOUSEWHEEL | |
2913 | case WM_MOUSEWHEEL: | |
2914 | processed = HandleMouseWheel(wParam, lParam); | |
2915 | break; | |
2916 | #endif | |
2917 | ||
2918 | case WM_LBUTTONDOWN: | |
2919 | case WM_LBUTTONUP: | |
2920 | case WM_LBUTTONDBLCLK: | |
2921 | case WM_RBUTTONDOWN: | |
2922 | case WM_RBUTTONUP: | |
2923 | case WM_RBUTTONDBLCLK: | |
2924 | case WM_MBUTTONDOWN: | |
2925 | case WM_MBUTTONUP: | |
2926 | case WM_MBUTTONDBLCLK: | |
2927 | #ifdef wxHAS_XBUTTON | |
2928 | case WM_XBUTTONDOWN: | |
2929 | case WM_XBUTTONUP: | |
2930 | case WM_XBUTTONDBLCLK: | |
2931 | #endif // wxHAS_XBUTTON | |
2932 | { | |
2933 | #ifdef __WXMICROWIN__ | |
2934 | // MicroWindows seems to ignore the fact that a window is | |
2935 | // disabled. So catch mouse events and throw them away if | |
2936 | // necessary. | |
2937 | wxWindowMSW* win = this; | |
2938 | for ( ;; ) | |
2939 | { | |
2940 | if (!win->IsEnabled()) | |
2941 | { | |
2942 | processed = true; | |
2943 | break; | |
2944 | } | |
2945 | ||
2946 | win = win->GetParent(); | |
2947 | if ( !win || win->IsTopLevel() ) | |
2948 | break; | |
2949 | } | |
2950 | ||
2951 | if ( processed ) | |
2952 | break; | |
2953 | ||
2954 | #endif // __WXMICROWIN__ | |
2955 | int x = GET_X_LPARAM(lParam), | |
2956 | y = GET_Y_LPARAM(lParam); | |
2957 | ||
2958 | #ifdef __WXWINCE__ | |
2959 | // redirect the event to a static control if necessary by | |
2960 | // finding one under mouse because under CE the static controls | |
2961 | // don't generate mouse events (even with SS_NOTIFY) | |
2962 | wxWindowMSW *win; | |
2963 | if ( GetCapture() == this ) | |
2964 | { | |
2965 | // but don't do it if the mouse is captured by this window | |
2966 | // because then it should really get this event itself | |
2967 | win = this; | |
2968 | } | |
2969 | else | |
2970 | { | |
2971 | win = FindWindowForMouseEvent(this, &x, &y); | |
2972 | ||
2973 | // this should never happen | |
2974 | wxCHECK_MSG( win, 0, | |
2975 | wxT("FindWindowForMouseEvent() returned NULL") ); | |
2976 | } | |
2977 | #ifdef __POCKETPC__ | |
2978 | if (IsContextMenuEnabled() && message == WM_LBUTTONDOWN) | |
2979 | { | |
2980 | SHRGINFO shrgi = {0}; | |
2981 | ||
2982 | shrgi.cbSize = sizeof(SHRGINFO); | |
2983 | shrgi.hwndClient = (HWND) GetHWND(); | |
2984 | shrgi.ptDown.x = x; | |
2985 | shrgi.ptDown.y = y; | |
2986 | ||
2987 | shrgi.dwFlags = SHRG_RETURNCMD; | |
2988 | // shrgi.dwFlags = SHRG_NOTIFYPARENT; | |
2989 | ||
2990 | if (GN_CONTEXTMENU == ::SHRecognizeGesture(&shrgi)) | |
2991 | { | |
2992 | wxPoint pt(x, y); | |
2993 | pt = ClientToScreen(pt); | |
2994 | ||
2995 | wxContextMenuEvent evtCtx(wxEVT_CONTEXT_MENU, GetId(), pt); | |
2996 | ||
2997 | evtCtx.SetEventObject(this); | |
2998 | if (HandleWindowEvent(evtCtx)) | |
2999 | { | |
3000 | processed = true; | |
3001 | return true; | |
3002 | } | |
3003 | } | |
3004 | } | |
3005 | #endif | |
3006 | ||
3007 | #else // !__WXWINCE__ | |
3008 | wxWindowMSW *win = this; | |
3009 | #endif // __WXWINCE__/!__WXWINCE__ | |
3010 | ||
3011 | processed = win->HandleMouseEvent(message, x, y, wParam); | |
3012 | ||
3013 | // if the app didn't eat the event, handle it in the default | |
3014 | // way, that is by giving this window the focus | |
3015 | if ( !processed ) | |
3016 | { | |
3017 | // for the standard classes their WndProc sets the focus to | |
3018 | // them anyhow and doing it from here results in some weird | |
3019 | // problems, so don't do it for them (unnecessary anyhow) | |
3020 | if ( !win->IsOfStandardClass() ) | |
3021 | { | |
3022 | if ( message == WM_LBUTTONDOWN && win->IsFocusable() ) | |
3023 | win->SetFocus(); | |
3024 | } | |
3025 | } | |
3026 | } | |
3027 | break; | |
3028 | ||
3029 | #ifdef MM_JOY1MOVE | |
3030 | case MM_JOY1MOVE: | |
3031 | case MM_JOY2MOVE: | |
3032 | case MM_JOY1ZMOVE: | |
3033 | case MM_JOY2ZMOVE: | |
3034 | case MM_JOY1BUTTONDOWN: | |
3035 | case MM_JOY2BUTTONDOWN: | |
3036 | case MM_JOY1BUTTONUP: | |
3037 | case MM_JOY2BUTTONUP: | |
3038 | processed = HandleJoystickEvent(message, | |
3039 | GET_X_LPARAM(lParam), | |
3040 | GET_Y_LPARAM(lParam), | |
3041 | wParam); | |
3042 | break; | |
3043 | #endif // __WXMICROWIN__ | |
3044 | ||
3045 | case WM_COMMAND: | |
3046 | { | |
3047 | WORD id, cmd; | |
3048 | WXHWND hwnd; | |
3049 | UnpackCommand(wParam, lParam, &id, &hwnd, &cmd); | |
3050 | ||
3051 | processed = HandleCommand(id, cmd, hwnd); | |
3052 | } | |
3053 | break; | |
3054 | ||
3055 | case WM_NOTIFY: | |
3056 | processed = HandleNotify((int)wParam, lParam, &rc.result); | |
3057 | break; | |
3058 | ||
3059 | // we only need to reply to WM_NOTIFYFORMAT manually when using MSLU, | |
3060 | // otherwise DefWindowProc() does it perfectly fine for us, but MSLU | |
3061 | // apparently doesn't always behave properly and needs some help | |
3062 | #if wxUSE_UNICODE_MSLU && defined(NF_QUERY) | |
3063 | case WM_NOTIFYFORMAT: | |
3064 | if ( lParam == NF_QUERY ) | |
3065 | { | |
3066 | processed = true; | |
3067 | rc.result = NFR_UNICODE; | |
3068 | } | |
3069 | break; | |
3070 | #endif // wxUSE_UNICODE_MSLU | |
3071 | ||
3072 | // for these messages we must return true if process the message | |
3073 | #ifdef WM_DRAWITEM | |
3074 | case WM_DRAWITEM: | |
3075 | processed = MSWOnDrawItem(wParam, (WXDRAWITEMSTRUCT *)lParam); | |
3076 | if ( processed ) | |
3077 | rc.result = TRUE; | |
3078 | break; | |
3079 | ||
3080 | case WM_MEASUREITEM: | |
3081 | processed = MSWOnMeasureItem(wParam, (WXMEASUREITEMSTRUCT *)lParam); | |
3082 | if ( processed ) | |
3083 | rc.result = TRUE; | |
3084 | break; | |
3085 | #endif // defined(WM_DRAWITEM) | |
3086 | ||
3087 | case WM_GETDLGCODE: | |
3088 | if ( !IsOfStandardClass() || HasFlag(wxWANTS_CHARS) ) | |
3089 | { | |
3090 | // we always want to get the char events | |
3091 | rc.result = DLGC_WANTCHARS; | |
3092 | ||
3093 | if ( HasFlag(wxWANTS_CHARS) ) | |
3094 | { | |
3095 | // in fact, we want everything | |
3096 | rc.result |= DLGC_WANTARROWS | | |
3097 | DLGC_WANTTAB | | |
3098 | DLGC_WANTALLKEYS; | |
3099 | } | |
3100 | ||
3101 | processed = true; | |
3102 | } | |
3103 | //else: get the dlg code from the DefWindowProc() | |
3104 | break; | |
3105 | ||
3106 | case WM_SYSKEYDOWN: | |
3107 | case WM_KEYDOWN: | |
3108 | // Generate the key down event in any case. | |
3109 | m_lastKeydownProcessed = HandleKeyDown((WORD) wParam, lParam); | |
3110 | if ( m_lastKeydownProcessed ) | |
3111 | { | |
3112 | // If it was processed by an event handler, we stop here, | |
3113 | // notably we intentionally don't generate char event then. | |
3114 | processed = true; | |
3115 | } | |
3116 | else // key down event not handled | |
3117 | { | |
3118 | // Examine the event to decide whether we need to generate a | |
3119 | // char event for it ourselves or let Windows do it. Window | |
3120 | // mostly only does it for the keys which produce printable | |
3121 | // characters (although there are exceptions, e.g. VK_ESCAPE or | |
3122 | // VK_BACK (but not VK_DELETE)) while we do it for all keys | |
3123 | // except the modifier ones (the wisdom of this is debatable | |
3124 | // but by now this decision is enshrined forever due to | |
3125 | // backwards compatibility). | |
3126 | switch ( wParam ) | |
3127 | { | |
3128 | // No wxEVT_CHAR events are generated for these keys at all. | |
3129 | case VK_SHIFT: | |
3130 | case VK_CONTROL: | |
3131 | case VK_MENU: | |
3132 | case VK_CAPITAL: | |
3133 | case VK_NUMLOCK: | |
3134 | case VK_SCROLL: | |
3135 | ||
3136 | // Windows will send us WM_CHAR for these ones so we'll | |
3137 | // generate wxEVT_CHAR for them later when we get it. | |
3138 | case VK_ESCAPE: | |
3139 | case VK_SPACE: | |
3140 | case VK_RETURN: | |
3141 | case VK_BACK: | |
3142 | case VK_TAB: | |
3143 | case VK_ADD: | |
3144 | case VK_SUBTRACT: | |
3145 | case VK_MULTIPLY: | |
3146 | case VK_DIVIDE: | |
3147 | case VK_DECIMAL: | |
3148 | case VK_NUMPAD0: | |
3149 | case VK_NUMPAD1: | |
3150 | case VK_NUMPAD2: | |
3151 | case VK_NUMPAD3: | |
3152 | case VK_NUMPAD4: | |
3153 | case VK_NUMPAD5: | |
3154 | case VK_NUMPAD6: | |
3155 | case VK_NUMPAD7: | |
3156 | case VK_NUMPAD8: | |
3157 | case VK_NUMPAD9: | |
3158 | case VK_OEM_1: | |
3159 | case VK_OEM_2: | |
3160 | case VK_OEM_3: | |
3161 | case VK_OEM_4: | |
3162 | case VK_OEM_5: | |
3163 | case VK_OEM_6: | |
3164 | case VK_OEM_7: | |
3165 | case VK_OEM_PLUS: | |
3166 | case VK_OEM_COMMA: | |
3167 | case VK_OEM_MINUS: | |
3168 | case VK_OEM_PERIOD: | |
3169 | break; | |
3170 | ||
3171 | #ifdef VK_APPS | |
3172 | // special case of VK_APPS: treat it the same as right mouse | |
3173 | // click because both usually pop up a context menu | |
3174 | case VK_APPS: | |
3175 | processed = HandleMouseEvent(WM_RBUTTONDOWN, -1, -1, 0); | |
3176 | break; | |
3177 | #endif // VK_APPS | |
3178 | ||
3179 | default: | |
3180 | if ( (wParam >= '0' && wParam <= '9') || | |
3181 | (wParam >= 'A' && wParam <= 'Z') ) | |
3182 | { | |
3183 | // We'll get WM_CHAR for those later too. | |
3184 | break; | |
3185 | } | |
3186 | ||
3187 | // But for the rest we won't get WM_CHAR later so we do | |
3188 | // need to generate the event right now. | |
3189 | wxKeyEvent event(wxEVT_CHAR); | |
3190 | InitAnyKeyEvent(event, wParam, lParam); | |
3191 | ||
3192 | // Set the "extended" bit in lParam because we want to | |
3193 | // generate CHAR events with WXK_HOME and not | |
3194 | // WXK_NUMPAD_HOME even if the "Home" key on numpad was | |
3195 | // pressed. | |
3196 | event.m_keyCode = wxMSWKeyboard::VKToWX | |
3197 | ( | |
3198 | wParam, | |
3199 | lParam | (KF_EXTENDED << 16) | |
3200 | ); | |
3201 | ||
3202 | // Don't produce events without any valid character | |
3203 | // code (even if this shouldn't normally happen...). | |
3204 | if ( event.m_keyCode != WXK_NONE ) | |
3205 | processed = HandleWindowEvent(event); | |
3206 | } | |
3207 | } | |
3208 | if (message == WM_SYSKEYDOWN) // Let Windows still handle the SYSKEYs | |
3209 | processed = false; | |
3210 | break; | |
3211 | ||
3212 | case WM_SYSKEYUP: | |
3213 | case WM_KEYUP: | |
3214 | #ifdef VK_APPS | |
3215 | // special case of VK_APPS: treat it the same as right mouse button | |
3216 | if ( wParam == VK_APPS ) | |
3217 | { | |
3218 | processed = HandleMouseEvent(WM_RBUTTONUP, -1, -1, 0); | |
3219 | } | |
3220 | else | |
3221 | #endif // VK_APPS | |
3222 | { | |
3223 | processed = HandleKeyUp((WORD) wParam, lParam); | |
3224 | } | |
3225 | break; | |
3226 | ||
3227 | case WM_SYSCHAR: | |
3228 | case WM_CHAR: // Always an ASCII character | |
3229 | if ( m_lastKeydownProcessed ) | |
3230 | { | |
3231 | // The key was handled in the EVT_KEY_DOWN and handling | |
3232 | // a key in an EVT_KEY_DOWN handler is meant, by | |
3233 | // design, to prevent EVT_CHARs from happening | |
3234 | m_lastKeydownProcessed = false; | |
3235 | processed = true; | |
3236 | } | |
3237 | else | |
3238 | { | |
3239 | processed = HandleChar((WORD)wParam, lParam); | |
3240 | } | |
3241 | break; | |
3242 | ||
3243 | case WM_IME_STARTCOMPOSITION: | |
3244 | // IME popup needs Escape as it should undo the changes in its | |
3245 | // entry window instead of e.g. closing the dialog for which the | |
3246 | // IME is used (and losing all the changes in the IME window). | |
3247 | gs_modalEntryWindowCount++; | |
3248 | break; | |
3249 | ||
3250 | case WM_IME_ENDCOMPOSITION: | |
3251 | gs_modalEntryWindowCount--; | |
3252 | break; | |
3253 | ||
3254 | #if wxUSE_HOTKEY | |
3255 | case WM_HOTKEY: | |
3256 | processed = HandleHotKey((WORD)wParam, lParam); | |
3257 | break; | |
3258 | #endif // wxUSE_HOTKEY | |
3259 | ||
3260 | case WM_CUT: | |
3261 | case WM_COPY: | |
3262 | case WM_PASTE: | |
3263 | processed = HandleClipboardEvent(message); | |
3264 | break; | |
3265 | ||
3266 | case WM_HSCROLL: | |
3267 | case WM_VSCROLL: | |
3268 | { | |
3269 | WXWORD code, pos; | |
3270 | WXHWND hwnd; | |
3271 | UnpackScroll(wParam, lParam, &code, &pos, &hwnd); | |
3272 | ||
3273 | processed = MSWOnScroll(message == WM_HSCROLL ? wxHORIZONTAL | |
3274 | : wxVERTICAL, | |
3275 | code, pos, hwnd); | |
3276 | } | |
3277 | break; | |
3278 | ||
3279 | // CTLCOLOR messages are sent by children to query the parent for their | |
3280 | // colors | |
3281 | #ifndef __WXMICROWIN__ | |
3282 | case WM_CTLCOLORMSGBOX: | |
3283 | case WM_CTLCOLOREDIT: | |
3284 | case WM_CTLCOLORLISTBOX: | |
3285 | case WM_CTLCOLORBTN: | |
3286 | case WM_CTLCOLORDLG: | |
3287 | case WM_CTLCOLORSCROLLBAR: | |
3288 | case WM_CTLCOLORSTATIC: | |
3289 | { | |
3290 | WXHDC hdc; | |
3291 | WXHWND hwnd; | |
3292 | UnpackCtlColor(wParam, lParam, &hdc, &hwnd); | |
3293 | ||
3294 | processed = HandleCtlColor(&rc.hBrush, (WXHDC)hdc, (WXHWND)hwnd); | |
3295 | } | |
3296 | break; | |
3297 | #endif // !__WXMICROWIN__ | |
3298 | ||
3299 | case WM_SYSCOLORCHANGE: | |
3300 | // the return value for this message is ignored | |
3301 | processed = HandleSysColorChange(); | |
3302 | break; | |
3303 | ||
3304 | #if !defined(__WXWINCE__) | |
3305 | case WM_DISPLAYCHANGE: | |
3306 | processed = HandleDisplayChange(); | |
3307 | break; | |
3308 | #endif | |
3309 | ||
3310 | case WM_PALETTECHANGED: | |
3311 | processed = HandlePaletteChanged((WXHWND)wParam); | |
3312 | break; | |
3313 | ||
3314 | case WM_CAPTURECHANGED: | |
3315 | processed = HandleCaptureChanged((WXHWND)lParam); | |
3316 | break; | |
3317 | ||
3318 | case WM_SETTINGCHANGE: | |
3319 | processed = HandleSettingChange(wParam, lParam); | |
3320 | break; | |
3321 | ||
3322 | case WM_QUERYNEWPALETTE: | |
3323 | processed = HandleQueryNewPalette(); | |
3324 | break; | |
3325 | ||
3326 | case WM_ERASEBKGND: | |
3327 | { | |
3328 | #ifdef wxHAS_MSW_BACKGROUND_ERASE_HOOK | |
3329 | // check if an override was configured for this window | |
3330 | EraseBgHooks::const_iterator it = gs_eraseBgHooks.find(this); | |
3331 | if ( it != gs_eraseBgHooks.end() ) | |
3332 | processed = it->second->MSWEraseBgHook((WXHDC)wParam); | |
3333 | else | |
3334 | #endif // wxHAS_MSW_BACKGROUND_ERASE_HOOK | |
3335 | processed = HandleEraseBkgnd((WXHDC)wParam); | |
3336 | } | |
3337 | ||
3338 | if ( processed ) | |
3339 | { | |
3340 | // we processed the message, i.e. erased the background | |
3341 | rc.result = TRUE; | |
3342 | } | |
3343 | break; | |
3344 | ||
3345 | #if !defined(__WXWINCE__) | |
3346 | case WM_DROPFILES: | |
3347 | processed = HandleDropFiles(wParam); | |
3348 | break; | |
3349 | #endif | |
3350 | ||
3351 | case WM_INITDIALOG: | |
3352 | processed = HandleInitDialog((WXHWND)wParam); | |
3353 | ||
3354 | if ( processed ) | |
3355 | { | |
3356 | // we never set focus from here | |
3357 | rc.result = FALSE; | |
3358 | } | |
3359 | break; | |
3360 | ||
3361 | #if !defined(__WXWINCE__) | |
3362 | case WM_QUERYENDSESSION: | |
3363 | processed = HandleQueryEndSession(lParam, &rc.allow); | |
3364 | break; | |
3365 | ||
3366 | case WM_ENDSESSION: | |
3367 | processed = HandleEndSession(wParam != 0, lParam); | |
3368 | break; | |
3369 | ||
3370 | case WM_GETMINMAXINFO: | |
3371 | processed = HandleGetMinMaxInfo((MINMAXINFO*)lParam); | |
3372 | break; | |
3373 | #endif | |
3374 | ||
3375 | case WM_SETCURSOR: | |
3376 | processed = HandleSetCursor((WXHWND)wParam, | |
3377 | LOWORD(lParam), // hit test | |
3378 | HIWORD(lParam)); // mouse msg | |
3379 | ||
3380 | if ( processed ) | |
3381 | { | |
3382 | // returning TRUE stops the DefWindowProc() from further | |
3383 | // processing this message - exactly what we need because we've | |
3384 | // just set the cursor. | |
3385 | rc.result = TRUE; | |
3386 | } | |
3387 | break; | |
3388 | ||
3389 | #if wxUSE_ACCESSIBILITY | |
3390 | case WM_GETOBJECT: | |
3391 | { | |
3392 | //WPARAM dwFlags = (WPARAM) (DWORD) wParam; | |
3393 | LPARAM dwObjId = (LPARAM) (DWORD) lParam; | |
3394 | ||
3395 | if (dwObjId == (LPARAM)OBJID_CLIENT && GetOrCreateAccessible()) | |
3396 | { | |
3397 | return LresultFromObject(IID_IAccessible, wParam, (IUnknown*) GetAccessible()->GetIAccessible()); | |
3398 | } | |
3399 | break; | |
3400 | } | |
3401 | #endif | |
3402 | ||
3403 | #if defined(WM_HELP) | |
3404 | case WM_HELP: | |
3405 | { | |
3406 | // by default, WM_HELP is propagated by DefWindowProc() upwards | |
3407 | // to the window parent but as we do it ourselves already | |
3408 | // (wxHelpEvent is derived from wxCommandEvent), we don't want | |
3409 | // to get the other events if we process this message at all | |
3410 | processed = true; | |
3411 | ||
3412 | // WM_HELP doesn't use lParam under CE | |
3413 | #ifndef __WXWINCE__ | |
3414 | HELPINFO* info = (HELPINFO*) lParam; | |
3415 | if ( info->iContextType == HELPINFO_WINDOW ) | |
3416 | { | |
3417 | #endif // !__WXWINCE__ | |
3418 | wxHelpEvent helpEvent | |
3419 | ( | |
3420 | wxEVT_HELP, | |
3421 | GetId(), | |
3422 | #ifdef __WXWINCE__ | |
3423 | wxGetMousePosition() // what else? | |
3424 | #else | |
3425 | wxPoint(info->MousePos.x, info->MousePos.y) | |
3426 | #endif | |
3427 | ); | |
3428 | ||
3429 | helpEvent.SetEventObject(this); | |
3430 | HandleWindowEvent(helpEvent); | |
3431 | #ifndef __WXWINCE__ | |
3432 | } | |
3433 | else if ( info->iContextType == HELPINFO_MENUITEM ) | |
3434 | { | |
3435 | wxHelpEvent helpEvent(wxEVT_HELP, info->iCtrlId); | |
3436 | helpEvent.SetEventObject(this); | |
3437 | HandleWindowEvent(helpEvent); | |
3438 | ||
3439 | } | |
3440 | else // unknown help event? | |
3441 | { | |
3442 | processed = false; | |
3443 | } | |
3444 | #endif // !__WXWINCE__ | |
3445 | } | |
3446 | break; | |
3447 | #endif // WM_HELP | |
3448 | ||
3449 | #if !defined(__WXWINCE__) | |
3450 | case WM_CONTEXTMENU: | |
3451 | { | |
3452 | // we don't convert from screen to client coordinates as | |
3453 | // the event may be handled by a parent window | |
3454 | wxPoint pt(GET_X_LPARAM(lParam), GET_Y_LPARAM(lParam)); | |
3455 | ||
3456 | wxContextMenuEvent evtCtx(wxEVT_CONTEXT_MENU, GetId(), pt); | |
3457 | ||
3458 | // we could have got an event from our child, reflect it back | |
3459 | // to it if this is the case | |
3460 | wxWindowMSW *win = NULL; | |
3461 | WXHWND hWnd = (WXHWND)wParam; | |
3462 | if ( hWnd != m_hWnd ) | |
3463 | { | |
3464 | win = FindItemByHWND(hWnd); | |
3465 | } | |
3466 | ||
3467 | if ( !win ) | |
3468 | win = this; | |
3469 | ||
3470 | evtCtx.SetEventObject(win); | |
3471 | processed = win->HandleWindowEvent(evtCtx); | |
3472 | } | |
3473 | break; | |
3474 | #endif | |
3475 | ||
3476 | #if wxUSE_MENUS | |
3477 | case WM_MENUCHAR: | |
3478 | // we're only interested in our own menus, not MF_SYSMENU | |
3479 | if ( HIWORD(wParam) == MF_POPUP ) | |
3480 | { | |
3481 | // handle menu chars for ownerdrawn menu items | |
3482 | int i = HandleMenuChar(toupper(LOWORD(wParam)), lParam); | |
3483 | if ( i != wxNOT_FOUND ) | |
3484 | { | |
3485 | rc.result = MAKELRESULT(i, MNC_EXECUTE); | |
3486 | processed = true; | |
3487 | } | |
3488 | } | |
3489 | break; | |
3490 | #endif // wxUSE_MENUS | |
3491 | ||
3492 | #ifndef __WXWINCE__ | |
3493 | case WM_POWERBROADCAST: | |
3494 | { | |
3495 | bool vetoed; | |
3496 | processed = HandlePower(wParam, lParam, &vetoed); | |
3497 | rc.result = processed && vetoed ? BROADCAST_QUERY_DENY : TRUE; | |
3498 | } | |
3499 | break; | |
3500 | #endif // __WXWINCE__ | |
3501 | ||
3502 | #if wxUSE_UXTHEME | |
3503 | // If we want the default themed border then we need to draw it ourselves | |
3504 | case WM_NCCALCSIZE: | |
3505 | { | |
3506 | wxUxThemeEngine* theme = wxUxThemeEngine::GetIfActive(); | |
3507 | const wxBorder border = TranslateBorder(GetBorder()); | |
3508 | if (theme && border == wxBORDER_THEME) | |
3509 | { | |
3510 | // first ask the widget to calculate the border size | |
3511 | rc.result = MSWDefWindowProc(message, wParam, lParam); | |
3512 | processed = true; | |
3513 | ||
3514 | // now alter the client size making room for drawing a | |
3515 | // themed border | |
3516 | RECT *rect; | |
3517 | NCCALCSIZE_PARAMS *csparam = NULL; | |
3518 | if ( wParam ) | |
3519 | { | |
3520 | csparam = (NCCALCSIZE_PARAMS *)lParam; | |
3521 | rect = &csparam->rgrc[0]; | |
3522 | } | |
3523 | else | |
3524 | { | |
3525 | rect = (RECT *)lParam; | |
3526 | } | |
3527 | ||
3528 | wxUxThemeHandle hTheme((const wxWindow *)this, L"EDIT"); | |
3529 | RECT rcClient = { 0, 0, 0, 0 }; | |
3530 | wxClientDC dc((wxWindow *)this); | |
3531 | wxMSWDCImpl *impl = (wxMSWDCImpl*) dc.GetImpl(); | |
3532 | ||
3533 | if ( theme->GetThemeBackgroundContentRect | |
3534 | ( | |
3535 | hTheme, | |
3536 | GetHdcOf(*impl), | |
3537 | EP_EDITTEXT, | |
3538 | ETS_NORMAL, | |
3539 | rect, | |
3540 | &rcClient) == S_OK ) | |
3541 | { | |
3542 | InflateRect(&rcClient, -1, -1); | |
3543 | if (wParam) | |
3544 | csparam->rgrc[0] = rcClient; | |
3545 | else | |
3546 | *((RECT*)lParam) = rcClient; | |
3547 | ||
3548 | // WVR_REDRAW triggers a bug whereby child windows are moved up and left, | |
3549 | // so don't use. | |
3550 | // rc.result = WVR_REDRAW; | |
3551 | } | |
3552 | } | |
3553 | } | |
3554 | break; | |
3555 | ||
3556 | case WM_NCPAINT: | |
3557 | { | |
3558 | wxUxThemeEngine* theme = wxUxThemeEngine::GetIfActive(); | |
3559 | const wxBorder border = TranslateBorder(GetBorder()); | |
3560 | if (theme && border == wxBORDER_THEME) | |
3561 | { | |
3562 | // first ask the widget to paint its non-client area, such as scrollbars, etc. | |
3563 | rc.result = MSWDefWindowProc(message, wParam, lParam); | |
3564 | processed = true; | |
3565 | ||
3566 | wxUxThemeHandle hTheme((const wxWindow *)this, L"EDIT"); | |
3567 | wxWindowDC dc((wxWindow *)this); | |
3568 | wxMSWDCImpl *impl = (wxMSWDCImpl*) dc.GetImpl(); | |
3569 | ||
3570 | // Clip the DC so that you only draw on the non-client area | |
3571 | RECT rcBorder; | |
3572 | wxCopyRectToRECT(GetSize(), rcBorder); | |
3573 | ||
3574 | RECT rcClient; | |
3575 | theme->GetThemeBackgroundContentRect( | |
3576 | hTheme, GetHdcOf(*impl), EP_EDITTEXT, ETS_NORMAL, &rcBorder, &rcClient); | |
3577 | InflateRect(&rcClient, -1, -1); | |
3578 | ||
3579 | ::ExcludeClipRect(GetHdcOf(*impl), rcClient.left, rcClient.top, | |
3580 | rcClient.right, rcClient.bottom); | |
3581 | ||
3582 | // Make sure the background is in a proper state | |
3583 | if (theme->IsThemeBackgroundPartiallyTransparent(hTheme, EP_EDITTEXT, ETS_NORMAL)) | |
3584 | { | |
3585 | theme->DrawThemeParentBackground(GetHwnd(), GetHdcOf(*impl), &rcBorder); | |
3586 | } | |
3587 | ||
3588 | // Draw the border | |
3589 | int nState; | |
3590 | if ( !IsEnabled() ) | |
3591 | nState = ETS_DISABLED; | |
3592 | // should we check this? | |
3593 | //else if ( ::GetWindowLong(GetHwnd(), GWL_STYLE) & ES_READONLY) | |
3594 | // nState = ETS_READONLY; | |
3595 | else | |
3596 | nState = ETS_NORMAL; | |
3597 | theme->DrawThemeBackground(hTheme, GetHdcOf(*impl), EP_EDITTEXT, nState, &rcBorder, NULL); | |
3598 | } | |
3599 | } | |
3600 | break; | |
3601 | ||
3602 | #endif // wxUSE_UXTHEME | |
3603 | ||
3604 | default: | |
3605 | // try a custom message handler | |
3606 | const MSWMessageHandlers::const_iterator | |
3607 | i = gs_messageHandlers.find(message); | |
3608 | if ( i != gs_messageHandlers.end() ) | |
3609 | { | |
3610 | processed = (*i->second)(this, message, wParam, lParam); | |
3611 | } | |
3612 | } | |
3613 | ||
3614 | if ( !processed ) | |
3615 | return false; | |
3616 | ||
3617 | *result = rc.result; | |
3618 | ||
3619 | return true; | |
3620 | } | |
3621 | ||
3622 | WXLRESULT wxWindowMSW::MSWWindowProc(WXUINT message, WXWPARAM wParam, WXLPARAM lParam) | |
3623 | { | |
3624 | WXLRESULT result; | |
3625 | if ( !MSWHandleMessage(&result, message, wParam, lParam) ) | |
3626 | { | |
3627 | #if wxDEBUG_LEVEL >= 2 | |
3628 | wxLogTrace("winmsg", wxT("Forwarding %s to DefWindowProc."), | |
3629 | wxGetMessageName(message)); | |
3630 | #endif // wxDEBUG_LEVEL >= 2 | |
3631 | result = MSWDefWindowProc(message, wParam, lParam); | |
3632 | } | |
3633 | ||
3634 | return result; | |
3635 | } | |
3636 | ||
3637 | // ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
3638 | // wxWindow <-> HWND map | |
3639 | // ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
3640 | ||
3641 | wxWindow *wxFindWinFromHandle(HWND hwnd) | |
3642 | { | |
3643 | WindowHandles::const_iterator i = gs_windowHandles.find(hwnd); | |
3644 | return i == gs_windowHandles.end() ? NULL : i->second; | |
3645 | } | |
3646 | ||
3647 | void wxAssociateWinWithHandle(HWND hwnd, wxWindowMSW *win) | |
3648 | { | |
3649 | // adding NULL hwnd is (first) surely a result of an error and | |
3650 | // (secondly) breaks menu command processing | |
3651 | wxCHECK_RET( hwnd != (HWND)NULL, | |
3652 | wxT("attempt to add a NULL hwnd to window list ignored") ); | |
3653 | ||
3654 | #if wxDEBUG_LEVEL | |
3655 | WindowHandles::const_iterator i = gs_windowHandles.find(hwnd); | |
3656 | if ( i != gs_windowHandles.end() ) | |
3657 | { | |
3658 | if ( i->second != win ) | |
3659 | { | |
3660 | wxFAIL_MSG( | |
3661 | wxString::Format( | |
3662 | wxT("HWND %p already associated with another window (%s)"), | |
3663 | hwnd, win->GetClassInfo()->GetClassName() | |
3664 | ) | |
3665 | ); | |
3666 | } | |
3667 | //else: this actually happens currently because we associate the window | |
3668 | // with its HWND during creation (if we create it) and also when | |
3669 | // SubclassWin() is called later, this is ok | |
3670 | } | |
3671 | #endif // wxDEBUG_LEVEL | |
3672 | ||
3673 | gs_windowHandles[hwnd] = (wxWindow *)win; | |
3674 | } | |
3675 | ||
3676 | void wxRemoveHandleAssociation(wxWindowMSW *win) | |
3677 | { | |
3678 | gs_windowHandles.erase(GetHwndOf(win)); | |
3679 | } | |
3680 | ||
3681 | // ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
3682 | // various MSW speciic class dependent functions | |
3683 | // ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
3684 | ||
3685 | // Default destroyer - override if you destroy it in some other way | |
3686 | // (e.g. with MDI child windows) | |
3687 | void wxWindowMSW::MSWDestroyWindow() | |
3688 | { | |
3689 | } | |
3690 | ||
3691 | void wxWindowMSW::MSWGetCreateWindowCoords(const wxPoint& pos, | |
3692 | const wxSize& size, | |
3693 | int& x, int& y, | |
3694 | int& w, int& h) const | |
3695 | { | |
3696 | // CW_USEDEFAULT can't be used for child windows so just position them at | |
3697 | // the origin by default | |
3698 | x = pos.x == wxDefaultCoord ? 0 : pos.x; | |
3699 | y = pos.y == wxDefaultCoord ? 0 : pos.y; | |
3700 | ||
3701 | AdjustForParentClientOrigin(x, y); | |
3702 | ||
3703 | // We don't have any clearly good choice for the size by default neither | |
3704 | // but we must use something non-zero. | |
3705 | w = WidthDefault(size.x); | |
3706 | h = HeightDefault(size.y); | |
3707 | ||
3708 | /* | |
3709 | NB: there used to be some code here which set the initial size of the | |
3710 | window to the client size of the parent if no explicit size was | |
3711 | specified. This was wrong because wxWidgets programs often assume | |
3712 | that they get a WM_SIZE (EVT_SIZE) upon creation, however this broke | |
3713 | it. To see why, you should understand that Windows sends WM_SIZE from | |
3714 | inside ::CreateWindow() anyhow. However, ::CreateWindow() is called | |
3715 | from some base class ctor and so this WM_SIZE is not processed in the | |
3716 | real class' OnSize() (because it's not fully constructed yet and the | |
3717 | event goes to some base class OnSize() instead). So the WM_SIZE we | |
3718 | rely on is the one sent when the parent frame resizes its children | |
3719 | but here is the problem: if the child already has just the right | |
3720 | size, nothing will happen as both wxWidgets and Windows check for | |
3721 | this and ignore any attempts to change the window size to the size it | |
3722 | already has - so no WM_SIZE would be sent. | |
3723 | */ | |
3724 | } | |
3725 | ||
3726 | WXHWND wxWindowMSW::MSWGetParent() const | |
3727 | { | |
3728 | return m_parent ? m_parent->GetHWND() : WXHWND(NULL); | |
3729 | } | |
3730 | ||
3731 | bool wxWindowMSW::MSWCreate(const wxChar *wclass, | |
3732 | const wxChar *title, | |
3733 | const wxPoint& pos, | |
3734 | const wxSize& size, | |
3735 | WXDWORD style, | |
3736 | WXDWORD extendedStyle) | |
3737 | { | |
3738 | // check a common bug in the user code: if the window is created with a | |
3739 | // non-default ctor and Create() is called too, we'd create 2 HWND for a | |
3740 | // single wxWindow object and this results in all sorts of trouble, | |
3741 | // especially for wxTLWs | |
3742 | wxCHECK_MSG( !m_hWnd, true, "window can't be recreated" ); | |
3743 | ||
3744 | // this can happen if this function is called using the return value of | |
3745 | // wxApp::GetRegisteredClassName() which failed | |
3746 | wxCHECK_MSG( wclass, false, "failed to register window class?" ); | |
3747 | ||
3748 | ||
3749 | // choose the position/size for the new window | |
3750 | int x, y, w, h; | |
3751 | (void)MSWGetCreateWindowCoords(pos, size, x, y, w, h); | |
3752 | ||
3753 | // controlId is menu handle for the top level windows, so set it to 0 | |
3754 | // unless we're creating a child window | |
3755 | int controlId = style & WS_CHILD ? GetId() : 0; | |
3756 | ||
3757 | // for each class "Foo" we have we also have "FooNR" ("no repaint") class | |
3758 | // which is the same but without CS_[HV]REDRAW class styles so using it | |
3759 | // ensures that the window is not fully repainted on each resize | |
3760 | wxString className(wclass); | |
3761 | if ( !HasFlag(wxFULL_REPAINT_ON_RESIZE) ) | |
3762 | { | |
3763 | className += wxApp::GetNoRedrawClassSuffix(); | |
3764 | } | |
3765 | ||
3766 | // do create the window | |
3767 | wxWindowCreationHook hook(this); | |
3768 | ||
3769 | m_hWnd = (WXHWND)::CreateWindowEx | |
3770 | ( | |
3771 | extendedStyle, | |
3772 | className.wx_str(), | |
3773 | title ? title : m_windowName.wx_str(), | |
3774 | style, | |
3775 | x, y, w, h, | |
3776 | (HWND)MSWGetParent(), | |
3777 | (HMENU)wxUIntToPtr(controlId), | |
3778 | wxGetInstance(), | |
3779 | NULL // no extra data | |
3780 | ); | |
3781 | ||
3782 | if ( !m_hWnd ) | |
3783 | { | |
3784 | wxLogSysError(_("Can't create window of class %s"), className.c_str()); | |
3785 | ||
3786 | return false; | |
3787 | } | |
3788 | ||
3789 | SubclassWin(m_hWnd); | |
3790 | ||
3791 | return true; | |
3792 | } | |
3793 | ||
3794 | // =========================================================================== | |
3795 | // MSW message handlers | |
3796 | // =========================================================================== | |
3797 | ||
3798 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
3799 | // WM_NOTIFY | |
3800 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
3801 | ||
3802 | bool wxWindowMSW::HandleNotify(int idCtrl, WXLPARAM lParam, WXLPARAM *result) | |
3803 | { | |
3804 | #ifndef __WXMICROWIN__ | |
3805 | LPNMHDR hdr = (LPNMHDR)lParam; | |
3806 | HWND hWnd = hdr->hwndFrom; | |
3807 | wxWindow *win = wxFindWinFromHandle(hWnd); | |
3808 | ||
3809 | // if the control is one of our windows, let it handle the message itself | |
3810 | if ( win ) | |
3811 | { | |
3812 | return win->MSWOnNotify(idCtrl, lParam, result); | |
3813 | } | |
3814 | ||
3815 | // VZ: why did we do it? normally this is unnecessary and, besides, it | |
3816 | // breaks the message processing for the toolbars because the tooltip | |
3817 | // notifications were being forwarded to the toolbar child controls | |
3818 | // (if it had any) before being passed to the toolbar itself, so in my | |
3819 | // example the tooltip for the combobox was always shown instead of the | |
3820 | // correct button tooltips | |
3821 | #if 0 | |
3822 | // try all our children | |
3823 | wxWindowList::compatibility_iterator node = GetChildren().GetFirst(); | |
3824 | while ( node ) | |
3825 | { | |
3826 | wxWindow *child = node->GetData(); | |
3827 | if ( child->MSWOnNotify(idCtrl, lParam, result) ) | |
3828 | { | |
3829 | return true; | |
3830 | } | |
3831 | ||
3832 | node = node->GetNext(); | |
3833 | } | |
3834 | #endif // 0 | |
3835 | ||
3836 | // by default, handle it ourselves | |
3837 | return MSWOnNotify(idCtrl, lParam, result); | |
3838 | #else // __WXMICROWIN__ | |
3839 | return false; | |
3840 | #endif | |
3841 | } | |
3842 | ||
3843 | #if wxUSE_TOOLTIPS | |
3844 | ||
3845 | bool wxWindowMSW::HandleTooltipNotify(WXUINT code, | |
3846 | WXLPARAM lParam, | |
3847 | const wxString& ttip) | |
3848 | { | |
3849 | // I don't know why it happens, but the versions of comctl32.dll starting | |
3850 | // from 4.70 sometimes send TTN_NEEDTEXTW even to ANSI programs (normally, | |
3851 | // this message is supposed to be sent to Unicode programs only) -- hence | |
3852 | // we need to handle it as well, otherwise no tooltips will be shown in | |
3853 | // this case | |
3854 | #ifndef __WXWINCE__ | |
3855 | if ( !(code == (WXUINT) TTN_NEEDTEXTA || code == (WXUINT) TTN_NEEDTEXTW) | |
3856 | || ttip.empty() ) | |
3857 | { | |
3858 | // not a tooltip message or no tooltip to show anyhow | |
3859 | return false; | |
3860 | } | |
3861 | #endif | |
3862 | ||
3863 | LPTOOLTIPTEXT ttText = (LPTOOLTIPTEXT)lParam; | |
3864 | ||
3865 | // We don't want to use the szText buffer because it has a limit of 80 | |
3866 | // bytes and this is not enough, especially for Unicode build where it | |
3867 | // limits the tooltip string length to only 40 characters | |
3868 | // | |
3869 | // The best would be, of course, to not impose any length limitations at | |
3870 | // all but then the buffer would have to be dynamic and someone would have | |
3871 | // to free it and we don't have the tooltip owner object here any more, so | |
3872 | // for now use our own static buffer with a higher fixed max length. | |
3873 | // | |
3874 | // Note that using a static buffer should not be a problem as only a single | |
3875 | // tooltip can be shown at the same time anyhow. | |
3876 | #if !wxUSE_UNICODE | |
3877 | if ( code == (WXUINT) TTN_NEEDTEXTW ) | |
3878 | { | |
3879 | // We need to convert tooltip from multi byte to Unicode on the fly. | |
3880 | static wchar_t buf[513]; | |
3881 | ||
3882 | // Truncate tooltip length if needed as otherwise we might not have | |
3883 | // enough space for it in the buffer and MultiByteToWideChar() would | |
3884 | // return an error | |
3885 | size_t tipLength = wxMin(ttip.length(), WXSIZEOF(buf) - 1); | |
3886 | ||
3887 | // Convert to WideChar without adding the NULL character. The NULL | |
3888 | // character is added afterwards (this is more efficient). | |
3889 | int len = ::MultiByteToWideChar | |
3890 | ( | |
3891 | CP_ACP, | |
3892 | 0, // no flags | |
3893 | ttip.wx_str(), | |
3894 | tipLength, | |
3895 | buf, | |
3896 | WXSIZEOF(buf) - 1 | |
3897 | ); | |
3898 | ||
3899 | if ( !len ) | |
3900 | { | |
3901 | wxLogLastError(wxT("MultiByteToWideChar()")); | |
3902 | } | |
3903 | ||
3904 | buf[len] = L'\0'; | |
3905 | ttText->lpszText = (LPSTR) buf; | |
3906 | } | |
3907 | else // TTN_NEEDTEXTA | |
3908 | #endif // !wxUSE_UNICODE | |
3909 | { | |
3910 | // we get here if we got TTN_NEEDTEXTA (only happens in ANSI build) or | |
3911 | // if we got TTN_NEEDTEXTW in Unicode build: in this case we just have | |
3912 | // to copy the string we have into the buffer | |
3913 | static wxChar buf[513]; | |
3914 | wxStrlcpy(buf, ttip.c_str(), WXSIZEOF(buf)); | |
3915 | ttText->lpszText = buf; | |
3916 | } | |
3917 | ||
3918 | return true; | |
3919 | } | |
3920 | ||
3921 | #endif // wxUSE_TOOLTIPS | |
3922 | ||
3923 | bool wxWindowMSW::MSWOnNotify(int WXUNUSED(idCtrl), | |
3924 | WXLPARAM lParam, | |
3925 | WXLPARAM* WXUNUSED(result)) | |
3926 | { | |
3927 | #if wxUSE_TOOLTIPS | |
3928 | if ( m_tooltip ) | |
3929 | { | |
3930 | NMHDR* hdr = (NMHDR *)lParam; | |
3931 | if ( HandleTooltipNotify(hdr->code, lParam, m_tooltip->GetTip())) | |
3932 | { | |
3933 | // processed | |
3934 | return true; | |
3935 | } | |
3936 | } | |
3937 | #else | |
3938 | wxUnusedVar(lParam); | |
3939 | #endif // wxUSE_TOOLTIPS | |
3940 | ||
3941 | return false; | |
3942 | } | |
3943 | ||
3944 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
3945 | // end session messages | |
3946 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
3947 | ||
3948 | bool wxWindowMSW::HandleQueryEndSession(long logOff, bool *mayEnd) | |
3949 | { | |
3950 | #ifdef ENDSESSION_LOGOFF | |
3951 | wxCloseEvent event(wxEVT_QUERY_END_SESSION, wxID_ANY); | |
3952 | event.SetEventObject(wxTheApp); | |
3953 | event.SetCanVeto(true); | |
3954 | event.SetLoggingOff(logOff == (long)ENDSESSION_LOGOFF); | |
3955 | ||
3956 | bool rc = wxTheApp->ProcessEvent(event); | |
3957 | ||
3958 | if ( rc ) | |
3959 | { | |
3960 | // we may end only if the app didn't veto session closing (double | |
3961 | // negation...) | |
3962 | *mayEnd = !event.GetVeto(); | |
3963 | } | |
3964 | ||
3965 | return rc; | |
3966 | #else | |
3967 | wxUnusedVar(logOff); | |
3968 | wxUnusedVar(mayEnd); | |
3969 | return false; | |
3970 | #endif | |
3971 | } | |
3972 | ||
3973 | bool wxWindowMSW::HandleEndSession(bool endSession, long logOff) | |
3974 | { | |
3975 | #ifdef ENDSESSION_LOGOFF | |
3976 | // do nothing if the session isn't ending | |
3977 | if ( !endSession ) | |
3978 | return false; | |
3979 | ||
3980 | // only send once | |
3981 | if ( (this != wxTheApp->GetTopWindow()) ) | |
3982 | return false; | |
3983 | ||
3984 | wxCloseEvent event(wxEVT_END_SESSION, wxID_ANY); | |
3985 | event.SetEventObject(wxTheApp); | |
3986 | event.SetCanVeto(false); | |
3987 | event.SetLoggingOff((logOff & ENDSESSION_LOGOFF) != 0); | |
3988 | ||
3989 | return wxTheApp->ProcessEvent(event); | |
3990 | #else | |
3991 | wxUnusedVar(endSession); | |
3992 | wxUnusedVar(logOff); | |
3993 | return false; | |
3994 | #endif | |
3995 | } | |
3996 | ||
3997 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
3998 | // window creation/destruction | |
3999 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
4000 | ||
4001 | bool wxWindowMSW::HandleCreate(WXLPCREATESTRUCT WXUNUSED_IN_WINCE(cs), | |
4002 | bool *mayCreate) | |
4003 | { | |
4004 | // VZ: why is this commented out for WinCE? If it doesn't support | |
4005 | // WS_EX_CONTROLPARENT at all it should be somehow handled globally, | |
4006 | // not with multiple #ifdef's! | |
4007 | #ifndef __WXWINCE__ | |
4008 | if ( ((CREATESTRUCT *)cs)->dwExStyle & WS_EX_CONTROLPARENT ) | |
4009 | EnsureParentHasControlParentStyle(GetParent()); | |
4010 | #endif // !__WXWINCE__ | |
4011 | ||
4012 | *mayCreate = true; | |
4013 | ||
4014 | return true; | |
4015 | } | |
4016 | ||
4017 | bool wxWindowMSW::HandleDestroy() | |
4018 | { | |
4019 | // delete our drop target if we've got one | |
4020 | #if wxUSE_DRAG_AND_DROP | |
4021 | if ( m_dropTarget != NULL ) | |
4022 | { | |
4023 | m_dropTarget->Revoke(m_hWnd); | |
4024 | ||
4025 | wxDELETE(m_dropTarget); | |
4026 | } | |
4027 | #endif // wxUSE_DRAG_AND_DROP | |
4028 | ||
4029 | // WM_DESTROY handled | |
4030 | return true; | |
4031 | } | |
4032 | ||
4033 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
4034 | // activation/focus | |
4035 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
4036 | ||
4037 | bool wxWindowMSW::HandleActivate(int state, | |
4038 | bool WXUNUSED(minimized), | |
4039 | WXHWND WXUNUSED(activate)) | |
4040 | { | |
4041 | wxActivateEvent event(wxEVT_ACTIVATE, | |
4042 | (state == WA_ACTIVE) || (state == WA_CLICKACTIVE), | |
4043 | m_windowId); | |
4044 | event.SetEventObject(this); | |
4045 | ||
4046 | return HandleWindowEvent(event); | |
4047 | } | |
4048 | ||
4049 | bool wxWindowMSW::HandleSetFocus(WXHWND hwnd) | |
4050 | { | |
4051 | // Strangly enough, some controls get set focus events when they are being | |
4052 | // deleted, even if they already had focus before. | |
4053 | if ( m_isBeingDeleted ) | |
4054 | { | |
4055 | return false; | |
4056 | } | |
4057 | ||
4058 | // notify the parent keeping track of focus for the kbd navigation | |
4059 | // purposes that we got it | |
4060 | wxChildFocusEvent eventFocus((wxWindow *)this); | |
4061 | (void)HandleWindowEvent(eventFocus); | |
4062 | ||
4063 | #if wxUSE_CARET | |
4064 | // Deal with caret | |
4065 | if ( m_caret ) | |
4066 | { | |
4067 | m_caret->OnSetFocus(); | |
4068 | } | |
4069 | #endif // wxUSE_CARET | |
4070 | ||
4071 | wxFocusEvent event(wxEVT_SET_FOCUS, m_windowId); | |
4072 | event.SetEventObject(this); | |
4073 | ||
4074 | // wxFindWinFromHandle() may return NULL, it is ok | |
4075 | event.SetWindow(wxFindWinFromHandle(hwnd)); | |
4076 | ||
4077 | return HandleWindowEvent(event); | |
4078 | } | |
4079 | ||
4080 | bool wxWindowMSW::HandleKillFocus(WXHWND hwnd) | |
4081 | { | |
4082 | #if wxUSE_CARET | |
4083 | // Deal with caret | |
4084 | if ( m_caret ) | |
4085 | { | |
4086 | m_caret->OnKillFocus(); | |
4087 | } | |
4088 | #endif // wxUSE_CARET | |
4089 | ||
4090 | // Don't send the event when in the process of being deleted. This can | |
4091 | // only cause problems if the event handler tries to access the object. | |
4092 | if ( m_isBeingDeleted ) | |
4093 | { | |
4094 | return false; | |
4095 | } | |
4096 | ||
4097 | wxFocusEvent event(wxEVT_KILL_FOCUS, m_windowId); | |
4098 | event.SetEventObject(this); | |
4099 | ||
4100 | // wxFindWinFromHandle() may return NULL, it is ok | |
4101 | event.SetWindow(wxFindWinFromHandle(hwnd)); | |
4102 | ||
4103 | return HandleWindowEvent(event); | |
4104 | } | |
4105 | ||
4106 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
4107 | // labels | |
4108 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
4109 | ||
4110 | void wxWindowMSW::SetLabel( const wxString& label) | |
4111 | { | |
4112 | SetWindowText(GetHwnd(), label.c_str()); | |
4113 | } | |
4114 | ||
4115 | wxString wxWindowMSW::GetLabel() const | |
4116 | { | |
4117 | return wxGetWindowText(GetHWND()); | |
4118 | } | |
4119 | ||
4120 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
4121 | // miscellaneous | |
4122 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
4123 | ||
4124 | bool wxWindowMSW::HandleShow(bool show, int WXUNUSED(status)) | |
4125 | { | |
4126 | wxShowEvent event(GetId(), show); | |
4127 | event.SetEventObject(this); | |
4128 | ||
4129 | return HandleWindowEvent(event); | |
4130 | } | |
4131 | ||
4132 | bool wxWindowMSW::HandleInitDialog(WXHWND WXUNUSED(hWndFocus)) | |
4133 | { | |
4134 | wxInitDialogEvent event(GetId()); | |
4135 | event.SetEventObject(this); | |
4136 | ||
4137 | return HandleWindowEvent(event); | |
4138 | } | |
4139 | ||
4140 | bool wxWindowMSW::HandleDropFiles(WXWPARAM wParam) | |
4141 | { | |
4142 | #if defined (__WXMICROWIN__) || defined(__WXWINCE__) | |
4143 | wxUnusedVar(wParam); | |
4144 | return false; | |
4145 | #else // __WXMICROWIN__ | |
4146 | HDROP hFilesInfo = (HDROP) wParam; | |
4147 | ||
4148 | // Get the total number of files dropped | |
4149 | UINT gwFilesDropped = ::DragQueryFile | |
4150 | ( | |
4151 | (HDROP)hFilesInfo, | |
4152 | (UINT)-1, | |
4153 | (LPTSTR)0, | |
4154 | (UINT)0 | |
4155 | ); | |
4156 | ||
4157 | wxString *files = new wxString[gwFilesDropped]; | |
4158 | for ( UINT wIndex = 0; wIndex < gwFilesDropped; wIndex++ ) | |
4159 | { | |
4160 | // first get the needed buffer length (+1 for terminating NUL) | |
4161 | size_t len = ::DragQueryFile(hFilesInfo, wIndex, NULL, 0) + 1; | |
4162 | ||
4163 | // and now get the file name | |
4164 | ::DragQueryFile(hFilesInfo, wIndex, | |
4165 | wxStringBuffer(files[wIndex], len), len); | |
4166 | } | |
4167 | ||
4168 | wxDropFilesEvent event(wxEVT_DROP_FILES, gwFilesDropped, files); | |
4169 | event.SetEventObject(this); | |
4170 | ||
4171 | POINT dropPoint; | |
4172 | DragQueryPoint(hFilesInfo, (LPPOINT) &dropPoint); | |
4173 | event.m_pos.x = dropPoint.x; | |
4174 | event.m_pos.y = dropPoint.y; | |
4175 | ||
4176 | DragFinish(hFilesInfo); | |
4177 | ||
4178 | return HandleWindowEvent(event); | |
4179 | #endif | |
4180 | } | |
4181 | ||
4182 | ||
4183 | bool wxWindowMSW::HandleSetCursor(WXHWND WXUNUSED(hWnd), | |
4184 | short nHitTest, | |
4185 | int WXUNUSED(mouseMsg)) | |
4186 | { | |
4187 | #ifndef __WXMICROWIN__ | |
4188 | // the logic is as follows: | |
4189 | // 0. if we're busy, set the busy cursor (even for non client elements) | |
4190 | // 1. don't set custom cursor for non client area of enabled windows | |
4191 | // 2. ask user EVT_SET_CURSOR handler for the cursor | |
4192 | // 3. if still no cursor but we're in a TLW, set the global cursor | |
4193 | ||
4194 | HCURSOR hcursor = 0; | |
4195 | if ( wxIsBusy() ) | |
4196 | { | |
4197 | hcursor = wxGetCurrentBusyCursor(); | |
4198 | } | |
4199 | else // not busy | |
4200 | { | |
4201 | if ( nHitTest != HTCLIENT ) | |
4202 | return false; | |
4203 | ||
4204 | // first ask the user code - it may wish to set the cursor in some very | |
4205 | // specific way (for example, depending on the current position) | |
4206 | POINT pt; | |
4207 | #ifdef __WXWINCE__ | |
4208 | if ( !::GetCursorPosWinCE(&pt)) | |
4209 | #else | |
4210 | if ( !::GetCursorPos(&pt) ) | |
4211 | #endif | |
4212 | { | |
4213 | wxLogLastError(wxT("GetCursorPos")); | |
4214 | } | |
4215 | ||
4216 | int x = pt.x, | |
4217 | y = pt.y; | |
4218 | ScreenToClient(&x, &y); | |
4219 | wxSetCursorEvent event(x, y); | |
4220 | event.SetId(GetId()); | |
4221 | event.SetEventObject(this); | |
4222 | ||
4223 | bool processedEvtSetCursor = HandleWindowEvent(event); | |
4224 | if ( processedEvtSetCursor && event.HasCursor() ) | |
4225 | { | |
4226 | hcursor = GetHcursorOf(event.GetCursor()); | |
4227 | } | |
4228 | ||
4229 | if ( !hcursor ) | |
4230 | { | |
4231 | // the test for processedEvtSetCursor is here to prevent using | |
4232 | // m_cursor if the user code caught EVT_SET_CURSOR() and returned | |
4233 | // nothing from it - this is a way to say that our cursor shouldn't | |
4234 | // be used for this point | |
4235 | if ( !processedEvtSetCursor && m_cursor.IsOk() ) | |
4236 | { | |
4237 | hcursor = GetHcursorOf(m_cursor); | |
4238 | } | |
4239 | ||
4240 | if ( !hcursor && !GetParent() ) | |
4241 | { | |
4242 | const wxCursor *cursor = wxGetGlobalCursor(); | |
4243 | if ( cursor && cursor->IsOk() ) | |
4244 | { | |
4245 | hcursor = GetHcursorOf(*cursor); | |
4246 | } | |
4247 | } | |
4248 | } | |
4249 | } | |
4250 | ||
4251 | ||
4252 | if ( hcursor ) | |
4253 | { | |
4254 | ::SetCursor(hcursor); | |
4255 | ||
4256 | // cursor set, stop here | |
4257 | return true; | |
4258 | } | |
4259 | #endif // __WXMICROWIN__ | |
4260 | ||
4261 | // pass up the window chain | |
4262 | return false; | |
4263 | } | |
4264 | ||
4265 | bool wxWindowMSW::HandlePower(WXWPARAM WXUNUSED_IN_WINCE(wParam), | |
4266 | WXLPARAM WXUNUSED(lParam), | |
4267 | bool *WXUNUSED_IN_WINCE(vetoed)) | |
4268 | { | |
4269 | #ifdef __WXWINCE__ | |
4270 | // FIXME | |
4271 | return false; | |
4272 | #else | |
4273 | wxEventType evtType; | |
4274 | switch ( wParam ) | |
4275 | { | |
4276 | case PBT_APMQUERYSUSPEND: | |
4277 | evtType = wxEVT_POWER_SUSPENDING; | |
4278 | break; | |
4279 | ||
4280 | case PBT_APMQUERYSUSPENDFAILED: | |
4281 | evtType = wxEVT_POWER_SUSPEND_CANCEL; | |
4282 | break; | |
4283 | ||
4284 | case PBT_APMSUSPEND: | |
4285 | evtType = wxEVT_POWER_SUSPENDED; | |
4286 | break; | |
4287 | ||
4288 | case PBT_APMRESUMESUSPEND: | |
4289 | evtType = wxEVT_POWER_RESUME; | |
4290 | break; | |
4291 | ||
4292 | default: | |
4293 | wxLogDebug(wxT("Unknown WM_POWERBROADCAST(%d) event"), wParam); | |
4294 | // fall through | |
4295 | ||
4296 | // these messages are currently not mapped to wx events | |
4297 | case PBT_APMQUERYSTANDBY: | |
4298 | case PBT_APMQUERYSTANDBYFAILED: | |
4299 | case PBT_APMSTANDBY: | |
4300 | case PBT_APMRESUMESTANDBY: | |
4301 | case PBT_APMBATTERYLOW: | |
4302 | case PBT_APMPOWERSTATUSCHANGE: | |
4303 | case PBT_APMOEMEVENT: | |
4304 | case PBT_APMRESUMECRITICAL: | |
4305 | #ifdef PBT_APMRESUMEAUTOMATIC | |
4306 | case PBT_APMRESUMEAUTOMATIC: | |
4307 | #endif | |
4308 | evtType = wxEVT_NULL; | |
4309 | break; | |
4310 | } | |
4311 | ||
4312 | // don't handle unknown messages | |
4313 | if ( evtType == wxEVT_NULL ) | |
4314 | return false; | |
4315 | ||
4316 | // TODO: notify about PBTF_APMRESUMEFROMFAILURE in case of resume events? | |
4317 | ||
4318 | wxPowerEvent event(evtType); | |
4319 | if ( !HandleWindowEvent(event) ) | |
4320 | return false; | |
4321 | ||
4322 | *vetoed = event.IsVetoed(); | |
4323 | ||
4324 | return true; | |
4325 | #endif | |
4326 | } | |
4327 | ||
4328 | bool wxWindowMSW::IsDoubleBuffered() const | |
4329 | { | |
4330 | for ( const wxWindowMSW *win = this; win; win = win->GetParent() ) | |
4331 | { | |
4332 | if ( wxHasWindowExStyle(win, WS_EX_COMPOSITED) ) | |
4333 | return true; | |
4334 | ||
4335 | if ( win->IsTopLevel() ) | |
4336 | break; | |
4337 | } | |
4338 | ||
4339 | return false; | |
4340 | } | |
4341 | ||
4342 | void wxWindowMSW::SetDoubleBuffered(bool on) | |
4343 | { | |
4344 | // Get the current extended style bits | |
4345 | long exstyle = wxGetWindowExStyle(this); | |
4346 | ||
4347 | // Twiddle the bit as needed | |
4348 | if ( on ) | |
4349 | exstyle |= WS_EX_COMPOSITED; | |
4350 | else | |
4351 | exstyle &= ~WS_EX_COMPOSITED; | |
4352 | ||
4353 | // put it back | |
4354 | wxSetWindowExStyle(this, exstyle); | |
4355 | } | |
4356 | ||
4357 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
4358 | // owner drawn stuff | |
4359 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
4360 | ||
4361 | #if (wxUSE_OWNER_DRAWN && wxUSE_MENUS_NATIVE) || \ | |
4362 | (wxUSE_CONTROLS && !defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__)) | |
4363 | #define WXUNUSED_UNLESS_ODRAWN(param) param | |
4364 | #else | |
4365 | #define WXUNUSED_UNLESS_ODRAWN(param) | |
4366 | #endif | |
4367 | ||
4368 | bool | |
4369 | wxWindowMSW::MSWOnDrawItem(int WXUNUSED_UNLESS_ODRAWN(id), | |
4370 | WXDRAWITEMSTRUCT * WXUNUSED_UNLESS_ODRAWN(itemStruct)) | |
4371 | { | |
4372 | #if wxUSE_OWNER_DRAWN | |
4373 | ||
4374 | #if wxUSE_MENUS_NATIVE | |
4375 | // is it a menu item? | |
4376 | DRAWITEMSTRUCT *pDrawStruct = (DRAWITEMSTRUCT *)itemStruct; | |
4377 | if ( id == 0 && pDrawStruct->CtlType == ODT_MENU ) | |
4378 | { | |
4379 | wxMenuItem *pMenuItem = (wxMenuItem *)(pDrawStruct->itemData); | |
4380 | ||
4381 | // see comment before the same test in MSWOnMeasureItem() below | |
4382 | if ( !pMenuItem ) | |
4383 | return false; | |
4384 | ||
4385 | wxCHECK_MSG( wxDynamicCast(pMenuItem, wxMenuItem), | |
4386 | false, wxT("MSWOnDrawItem: bad wxMenuItem pointer") ); | |
4387 | ||
4388 | // prepare to call OnDrawItem(): notice using of wxDCTemp to prevent | |
4389 | // the DC from being released | |
4390 | wxDCTemp dc((WXHDC)pDrawStruct->hDC); | |
4391 | wxRect rect(pDrawStruct->rcItem.left, pDrawStruct->rcItem.top, | |
4392 | pDrawStruct->rcItem.right - pDrawStruct->rcItem.left, | |
4393 | pDrawStruct->rcItem.bottom - pDrawStruct->rcItem.top); | |
4394 | ||
4395 | return pMenuItem->OnDrawItem | |
4396 | ( | |
4397 | dc, | |
4398 | rect, | |
4399 | (wxOwnerDrawn::wxODAction)pDrawStruct->itemAction, | |
4400 | (wxOwnerDrawn::wxODStatus)pDrawStruct->itemState | |
4401 | ); | |
4402 | } | |
4403 | #endif // wxUSE_MENUS_NATIVE | |
4404 | ||
4405 | #endif // USE_OWNER_DRAWN | |
4406 | ||
4407 | #if wxUSE_CONTROLS && !defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__) | |
4408 | ||
4409 | #if wxUSE_OWNER_DRAWN | |
4410 | wxControl *item = wxDynamicCast(FindItem(id), wxControl); | |
4411 | #else // !wxUSE_OWNER_DRAWN | |
4412 | // we may still have owner-drawn buttons internally because we have to make | |
4413 | // them owner-drawn to support colour change | |
4414 | wxControl *item = | |
4415 | # if wxUSE_BUTTON | |
4416 | wxDynamicCast(FindItem(id), wxButton) | |
4417 | # else | |
4418 | NULL | |
4419 | # endif | |
4420 | ; | |
4421 | #endif // USE_OWNER_DRAWN | |
4422 | ||
4423 | if ( item ) | |
4424 | { | |
4425 | return item->MSWOnDraw(itemStruct); | |
4426 | } | |
4427 | ||
4428 | #endif // wxUSE_CONTROLS | |
4429 | ||
4430 | return false; | |
4431 | } | |
4432 | ||
4433 | bool | |
4434 | wxWindowMSW::MSWOnMeasureItem(int id, WXMEASUREITEMSTRUCT *itemStruct) | |
4435 | { | |
4436 | #if wxUSE_OWNER_DRAWN && wxUSE_MENUS_NATIVE | |
4437 | // is it a menu item? | |
4438 | MEASUREITEMSTRUCT *pMeasureStruct = (MEASUREITEMSTRUCT *)itemStruct; | |
4439 | if ( id == 0 && pMeasureStruct->CtlType == ODT_MENU ) | |
4440 | { | |
4441 | wxMenuItem *pMenuItem = (wxMenuItem *)(pMeasureStruct->itemData); | |
4442 | ||
4443 | // according to Carsten Fuchs the pointer may be NULL under XP if an | |
4444 | // MDI child frame is initially maximized, see this for more info: | |
4445 | // http://article.gmane.org/gmane.comp.lib.wxwidgets.general/27745 | |
4446 | // | |
4447 | // so silently ignore it instead of asserting | |
4448 | if ( !pMenuItem ) | |
4449 | return false; | |
4450 | ||
4451 | wxCHECK_MSG( wxDynamicCast(pMenuItem, wxMenuItem), | |
4452 | false, wxT("MSWOnMeasureItem: bad wxMenuItem pointer") ); | |
4453 | ||
4454 | size_t w, h; | |
4455 | bool rc = pMenuItem->OnMeasureItem(&w, &h); | |
4456 | ||
4457 | pMeasureStruct->itemWidth = w; | |
4458 | pMeasureStruct->itemHeight = h; | |
4459 | ||
4460 | return rc; | |
4461 | } | |
4462 | ||
4463 | wxControl *item = wxDynamicCast(FindItem(id), wxControl); | |
4464 | if ( item ) | |
4465 | { | |
4466 | return item->MSWOnMeasure(itemStruct); | |
4467 | } | |
4468 | #else | |
4469 | wxUnusedVar(id); | |
4470 | wxUnusedVar(itemStruct); | |
4471 | #endif // wxUSE_OWNER_DRAWN && wxUSE_MENUS_NATIVE | |
4472 | ||
4473 | return false; | |
4474 | } | |
4475 | ||
4476 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
4477 | // colours and palettes | |
4478 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
4479 | ||
4480 | bool wxWindowMSW::HandleSysColorChange() | |
4481 | { | |
4482 | wxSysColourChangedEvent event; | |
4483 | event.SetEventObject(this); | |
4484 | ||
4485 | (void)HandleWindowEvent(event); | |
4486 | ||
4487 | // always let the system carry on the default processing to allow the | |
4488 | // native controls to react to the colours update | |
4489 | return false; | |
4490 | } | |
4491 | ||
4492 | bool wxWindowMSW::HandleDisplayChange() | |
4493 | { | |
4494 | wxDisplayChangedEvent event; | |
4495 | event.SetEventObject(this); | |
4496 | ||
4497 | return HandleWindowEvent(event); | |
4498 | } | |
4499 | ||
4500 | #ifndef __WXMICROWIN__ | |
4501 | ||
4502 | bool wxWindowMSW::HandleCtlColor(WXHBRUSH *brush, WXHDC hDC, WXHWND hWnd) | |
4503 | { | |
4504 | #if !wxUSE_CONTROLS || defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__) | |
4505 | wxUnusedVar(hDC); | |
4506 | wxUnusedVar(hWnd); | |
4507 | #else | |
4508 | wxControl *item = wxDynamicCast(FindItemByHWND(hWnd, true), wxControl); | |
4509 | ||
4510 | if ( item ) | |
4511 | *brush = item->MSWControlColor(hDC, hWnd); | |
4512 | else | |
4513 | #endif // wxUSE_CONTROLS | |
4514 | *brush = NULL; | |
4515 | ||
4516 | return *brush != NULL; | |
4517 | } | |
4518 | ||
4519 | #endif // __WXMICROWIN__ | |
4520 | ||
4521 | bool wxWindowMSW::HandlePaletteChanged(WXHWND hWndPalChange) | |
4522 | { | |
4523 | #if wxUSE_PALETTE | |
4524 | // same as below except we don't respond to our own messages | |
4525 | if ( hWndPalChange != GetHWND() ) | |
4526 | { | |
4527 | // check to see if we our our parents have a custom palette | |
4528 | wxWindowMSW *win = this; | |
4529 | while ( win && !win->HasCustomPalette() ) | |
4530 | { | |
4531 | win = win->GetParent(); | |
4532 | } | |
4533 | ||
4534 | if ( win && win->HasCustomPalette() ) | |
4535 | { | |
4536 | // realize the palette to see whether redrawing is needed | |
4537 | HDC hdc = ::GetDC((HWND) hWndPalChange); | |
4538 | win->m_palette.SetHPALETTE((WXHPALETTE) | |
4539 | ::SelectPalette(hdc, GetHpaletteOf(win->m_palette), FALSE)); | |
4540 | ||
4541 | int result = ::RealizePalette(hdc); | |
4542 | ||
4543 | // restore the palette (before releasing the DC) | |
4544 | win->m_palette.SetHPALETTE((WXHPALETTE) | |
4545 | ::SelectPalette(hdc, GetHpaletteOf(win->m_palette), FALSE)); | |
4546 | ::RealizePalette(hdc); | |
4547 | ::ReleaseDC((HWND) hWndPalChange, hdc); | |
4548 | ||
4549 | // now check for the need to redraw | |
4550 | if (result > 0) | |
4551 | ::InvalidateRect((HWND) hWndPalChange, NULL, TRUE); | |
4552 | } | |
4553 | ||
4554 | } | |
4555 | #endif // wxUSE_PALETTE | |
4556 | ||
4557 | wxPaletteChangedEvent event(GetId()); | |
4558 | event.SetEventObject(this); | |
4559 | event.SetChangedWindow(wxFindWinFromHandle(hWndPalChange)); | |
4560 | ||
4561 | return HandleWindowEvent(event); | |
4562 | } | |
4563 | ||
4564 | bool wxWindowMSW::HandleCaptureChanged(WXHWND hWndGainedCapture) | |
4565 | { | |
4566 | // notify windows on the capture stack about lost capture | |
4567 | // (see http://sourceforge.net/tracker/index.php?func=detail&aid=1153662&group_id=9863&atid=109863): | |
4568 | wxWindowBase::NotifyCaptureLost(); | |
4569 | ||
4570 | wxWindow *win = wxFindWinFromHandle(hWndGainedCapture); | |
4571 | wxMouseCaptureChangedEvent event(GetId(), win); | |
4572 | event.SetEventObject(this); | |
4573 | return HandleWindowEvent(event); | |
4574 | } | |
4575 | ||
4576 | bool wxWindowMSW::HandleSettingChange(WXWPARAM wParam, WXLPARAM lParam) | |
4577 | { | |
4578 | // despite MSDN saying "(This message cannot be sent directly to a window.)" | |
4579 | // we need to send this to child windows (it is only sent to top-level | |
4580 | // windows) so {list,tree}ctrls can adjust their font size if necessary | |
4581 | // this is exactly how explorer does it to enable the font size changes | |
4582 | ||
4583 | wxWindowList::compatibility_iterator node = GetChildren().GetFirst(); | |
4584 | while ( node ) | |
4585 | { | |
4586 | // top-level windows already get this message from the system | |
4587 | wxWindow *win = node->GetData(); | |
4588 | if ( !win->IsTopLevel() ) | |
4589 | { | |
4590 | ::SendMessage(GetHwndOf(win), WM_SETTINGCHANGE, wParam, lParam); | |
4591 | } | |
4592 | ||
4593 | node = node->GetNext(); | |
4594 | } | |
4595 | ||
4596 | // let the system handle it | |
4597 | return false; | |
4598 | } | |
4599 | ||
4600 | bool wxWindowMSW::HandleQueryNewPalette() | |
4601 | { | |
4602 | ||
4603 | #if wxUSE_PALETTE | |
4604 | // check to see if we our our parents have a custom palette | |
4605 | wxWindowMSW *win = this; | |
4606 | while (!win->HasCustomPalette() && win->GetParent()) win = win->GetParent(); | |
4607 | if (win->HasCustomPalette()) { | |
4608 | /* realize the palette to see whether redrawing is needed */ | |
4609 | HDC hdc = ::GetDC((HWND) GetHWND()); | |
4610 | win->m_palette.SetHPALETTE( (WXHPALETTE) | |
4611 | ::SelectPalette(hdc, (HPALETTE) win->m_palette.GetHPALETTE(), FALSE) ); | |
4612 | ||
4613 | int result = ::RealizePalette(hdc); | |
4614 | /* restore the palette (before releasing the DC) */ | |
4615 | win->m_palette.SetHPALETTE( (WXHPALETTE) | |
4616 | ::SelectPalette(hdc, (HPALETTE) win->m_palette.GetHPALETTE(), TRUE) ); | |
4617 | ::RealizePalette(hdc); | |
4618 | ::ReleaseDC((HWND) GetHWND(), hdc); | |
4619 | /* now check for the need to redraw */ | |
4620 | if (result > 0) | |
4621 | ::InvalidateRect((HWND) GetHWND(), NULL, TRUE); | |
4622 | } | |
4623 | #endif // wxUSE_PALETTE | |
4624 | ||
4625 | wxQueryNewPaletteEvent event(GetId()); | |
4626 | event.SetEventObject(this); | |
4627 | ||
4628 | return HandleWindowEvent(event) && event.GetPaletteRealized(); | |
4629 | } | |
4630 | ||
4631 | // Responds to colour changes: passes event on to children. | |
4632 | void wxWindowMSW::OnSysColourChanged(wxSysColourChangedEvent& WXUNUSED(event)) | |
4633 | { | |
4634 | // the top level window also reset the standard colour map as it might have | |
4635 | // changed (there is no need to do it for the non top level windows as we | |
4636 | // only have to do it once) | |
4637 | if ( IsTopLevel() ) | |
4638 | { | |
4639 | // FIXME-MT | |
4640 | gs_hasStdCmap = false; | |
4641 | } | |
4642 | wxWindowList::compatibility_iterator node = GetChildren().GetFirst(); | |
4643 | while ( node ) | |
4644 | { | |
4645 | // Only propagate to non-top-level windows because Windows already | |
4646 | // sends this event to all top-level ones | |
4647 | wxWindow *win = node->GetData(); | |
4648 | if ( !win->IsTopLevel() ) | |
4649 | { | |
4650 | // we need to send the real WM_SYSCOLORCHANGE and not just trigger | |
4651 | // EVT_SYS_COLOUR_CHANGED call because the latter wouldn't work for | |
4652 | // the standard controls | |
4653 | ::SendMessage(GetHwndOf(win), WM_SYSCOLORCHANGE, 0, 0); | |
4654 | } | |
4655 | ||
4656 | node = node->GetNext(); | |
4657 | } | |
4658 | } | |
4659 | ||
4660 | extern wxCOLORMAP *wxGetStdColourMap() | |
4661 | { | |
4662 | static COLORREF s_stdColours[wxSTD_COL_MAX]; | |
4663 | static wxCOLORMAP s_cmap[wxSTD_COL_MAX]; | |
4664 | ||
4665 | if ( !gs_hasStdCmap ) | |
4666 | { | |
4667 | static bool s_coloursInit = false; | |
4668 | ||
4669 | if ( !s_coloursInit ) | |
4670 | { | |
4671 | // When a bitmap is loaded, the RGB values can change (apparently | |
4672 | // because Windows adjusts them to care for the old programs always | |
4673 | // using 0xc0c0c0 while the transparent colour for the new Windows | |
4674 | // versions is different). But we do this adjustment ourselves so | |
4675 | // we want to avoid Windows' "help" and for this we need to have a | |
4676 | // reference bitmap which can tell us what the RGB values change | |
4677 | // to. | |
4678 | wxLogNull logNo; // suppress error if we couldn't load the bitmap | |
4679 | wxBitmap stdColourBitmap(wxT("wxBITMAP_STD_COLOURS")); | |
4680 | if ( stdColourBitmap.IsOk() ) | |
4681 | { | |
4682 | // the pixels in the bitmap must correspond to wxSTD_COL_XXX! | |
4683 | wxASSERT_MSG( stdColourBitmap.GetWidth() == wxSTD_COL_MAX, | |
4684 | wxT("forgot to update wxBITMAP_STD_COLOURS!") ); | |
4685 | ||
4686 | wxMemoryDC memDC; | |
4687 | memDC.SelectObject(stdColourBitmap); | |
4688 | ||
4689 | wxColour colour; | |
4690 | for ( size_t i = 0; i < WXSIZEOF(s_stdColours); i++ ) | |
4691 | { | |
4692 | memDC.GetPixel(i, 0, &colour); | |
4693 | s_stdColours[i] = wxColourToRGB(colour); | |
4694 | } | |
4695 | } | |
4696 | else // wxBITMAP_STD_COLOURS couldn't be loaded | |
4697 | { | |
4698 | s_stdColours[0] = RGB(000,000,000); // black | |
4699 | s_stdColours[1] = RGB(128,128,128); // dark grey | |
4700 | s_stdColours[2] = RGB(192,192,192); // light grey | |
4701 | s_stdColours[3] = RGB(255,255,255); // white | |
4702 | //s_stdColours[4] = RGB(000,000,255); // blue | |
4703 | //s_stdColours[5] = RGB(255,000,255); // magenta | |
4704 | } | |
4705 | ||
4706 | s_coloursInit = true; | |
4707 | } | |
4708 | ||
4709 | gs_hasStdCmap = true; | |
4710 | ||
4711 | // create the colour map | |
4712 | #define INIT_CMAP_ENTRY(col) \ | |
4713 | s_cmap[wxSTD_COL_##col].from = s_stdColours[wxSTD_COL_##col]; \ | |
4714 | s_cmap[wxSTD_COL_##col].to = ::GetSysColor(COLOR_##col) | |
4715 | ||
4716 | INIT_CMAP_ENTRY(BTNTEXT); | |
4717 | INIT_CMAP_ENTRY(BTNSHADOW); | |
4718 | INIT_CMAP_ENTRY(BTNFACE); | |
4719 | INIT_CMAP_ENTRY(BTNHIGHLIGHT); | |
4720 | ||
4721 | #undef INIT_CMAP_ENTRY | |
4722 | } | |
4723 | ||
4724 | return s_cmap; | |
4725 | } | |
4726 | ||
4727 | #if wxUSE_UXTHEME && !defined(TMT_FILLCOLOR) | |
4728 | #define TMT_FILLCOLOR 3802 | |
4729 | #define TMT_TEXTCOLOR 3803 | |
4730 | #define TMT_BORDERCOLOR 3801 | |
4731 | #endif | |
4732 | ||
4733 | wxColour wxWindowMSW::MSWGetThemeColour(const wchar_t *themeName, | |
4734 | int themePart, | |
4735 | int themeState, | |
4736 | MSWThemeColour themeColour, | |
4737 | wxSystemColour fallback) const | |
4738 | { | |
4739 | #if wxUSE_UXTHEME | |
4740 | const wxUxThemeEngine* theme = wxUxThemeEngine::GetIfActive(); | |
4741 | if ( theme ) | |
4742 | { | |
4743 | int themeProperty = 0; | |
4744 | ||
4745 | // TODO: Convert this into a table? Sure would be faster. | |
4746 | switch ( themeColour ) | |
4747 | { | |
4748 | case ThemeColourBackground: | |
4749 | themeProperty = TMT_FILLCOLOR; | |
4750 | break; | |
4751 | case ThemeColourText: | |
4752 | themeProperty = TMT_TEXTCOLOR; | |
4753 | break; | |
4754 | case ThemeColourBorder: | |
4755 | themeProperty = TMT_BORDERCOLOR; | |
4756 | break; | |
4757 | default: | |
4758 | wxFAIL_MSG(wxT("unsupported theme colour")); | |
4759 | }; | |
4760 | ||
4761 | wxUxThemeHandle hTheme((const wxWindow *)this, themeName); | |
4762 | COLORREF col; | |
4763 | HRESULT hr = theme->GetThemeColor | |
4764 | ( | |
4765 | hTheme, | |
4766 | themePart, | |
4767 | themeState, | |
4768 | themeProperty, | |
4769 | &col | |
4770 | ); | |
4771 | ||
4772 | if ( SUCCEEDED(hr) ) | |
4773 | return wxRGBToColour(col); | |
4774 | ||
4775 | wxLogApiError( | |
4776 | wxString::Format( | |
4777 | "GetThemeColor(%s, %i, %i, %i)", | |
4778 | themeName, themePart, themeState, themeProperty), | |
4779 | hr); | |
4780 | } | |
4781 | #else | |
4782 | wxUnusedVar(themeName); | |
4783 | wxUnusedVar(themePart); | |
4784 | wxUnusedVar(themeState); | |
4785 | wxUnusedVar(themeColour); | |
4786 | #endif | |
4787 | return wxSystemSettings::GetColour(fallback); | |
4788 | } | |
4789 | ||
4790 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
4791 | // painting | |
4792 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
4793 | ||
4794 | // this variable is used to check that a paint event handler which processed | |
4795 | // the event did create a wxPaintDC inside its code and called BeginPaint() to | |
4796 | // validate the invalidated window area as otherwise we'd keep getting an | |
4797 | // endless stream of WM_PAINT messages for this window resulting in a lot of | |
4798 | // difficult to debug problems (e.g. impossibility to repaint other windows, | |
4799 | // lack of timer and idle events and so on) | |
4800 | extern bool wxDidCreatePaintDC; | |
4801 | bool wxDidCreatePaintDC = false; | |
4802 | ||
4803 | bool wxWindowMSW::HandlePaint() | |
4804 | { | |
4805 | HRGN hRegion = ::CreateRectRgn(0, 0, 0, 0); // Dummy call to get a handle | |
4806 | if ( !hRegion ) | |
4807 | { | |
4808 | wxLogLastError(wxT("CreateRectRgn")); | |
4809 | } | |
4810 | if ( ::GetUpdateRgn(GetHwnd(), hRegion, FALSE) == ERROR ) | |
4811 | { | |
4812 | wxLogLastError(wxT("GetUpdateRgn")); | |
4813 | } | |
4814 | ||
4815 | m_updateRegion = wxRegion((WXHRGN) hRegion); | |
4816 | ||
4817 | wxDidCreatePaintDC = false; | |
4818 | ||
4819 | wxPaintEvent event(m_windowId); | |
4820 | event.SetEventObject(this); | |
4821 | ||
4822 | bool processed = HandleWindowEvent(event); | |
4823 | ||
4824 | if ( processed && !wxDidCreatePaintDC ) | |
4825 | { | |
4826 | // do call MSWDefWindowProc() to validate the update region to avoid | |
4827 | // the problems mentioned above | |
4828 | processed = false; | |
4829 | } | |
4830 | ||
4831 | // note that we must generate NC event after the normal one as otherwise | |
4832 | // BeginPaint() will happily overwrite our decorations with the background | |
4833 | // colour | |
4834 | wxNcPaintEvent eventNc(m_windowId); | |
4835 | eventNc.SetEventObject(this); | |
4836 | HandleWindowEvent(eventNc); | |
4837 | ||
4838 | // don't keep an HRGN we don't need any longer (GetUpdateRegion() can only | |
4839 | // be called from inside the event handlers called above) | |
4840 | m_updateRegion.Clear(); | |
4841 | ||
4842 | return processed; | |
4843 | } | |
4844 | ||
4845 | // Can be called from an application's OnPaint handler | |
4846 | void wxWindowMSW::OnPaint(wxPaintEvent& event) | |
4847 | { | |
4848 | #ifdef __WXUNIVERSAL__ | |
4849 | event.Skip(); | |
4850 | #else | |
4851 | HDC hDC = (HDC) wxPaintDCImpl::FindDCInCache((wxWindow*) event.GetEventObject()); | |
4852 | if (hDC != 0) | |
4853 | { | |
4854 | MSWDefWindowProc(WM_PAINT, (WPARAM) hDC, 0); | |
4855 | } | |
4856 | #endif | |
4857 | } | |
4858 | ||
4859 | bool wxWindowMSW::HandleEraseBkgnd(WXHDC hdc) | |
4860 | { | |
4861 | switch ( GetBackgroundStyle() ) | |
4862 | { | |
4863 | case wxBG_STYLE_ERASE: | |
4864 | case wxBG_STYLE_COLOUR: | |
4865 | // we need to generate an erase background event | |
4866 | { | |
4867 | wxDCTemp dc(hdc, GetClientSize()); | |
4868 | wxDCTempImpl *impl = (wxDCTempImpl*) dc.GetImpl(); | |
4869 | ||
4870 | impl->SetHDC(hdc); | |
4871 | impl->SetWindow((wxWindow *)this); | |
4872 | ||
4873 | wxEraseEvent event(m_windowId, &dc); | |
4874 | event.SetEventObject(this); | |
4875 | bool rc = HandleWindowEvent(event); | |
4876 | ||
4877 | // must be called manually as ~wxDC doesn't do anything for | |
4878 | // wxDCTemp | |
4879 | impl->SelectOldObjects(hdc); | |
4880 | ||
4881 | if ( rc ) | |
4882 | { | |
4883 | // background erased by the user-defined handler | |
4884 | return true; | |
4885 | } | |
4886 | } | |
4887 | // fall through | |
4888 | ||
4889 | case wxBG_STYLE_SYSTEM: | |
4890 | if ( !DoEraseBackground(hdc) ) | |
4891 | { | |
4892 | // let the default processing to take place if we didn't erase | |
4893 | // the background ourselves | |
4894 | return false; | |
4895 | } | |
4896 | break; | |
4897 | ||
4898 | case wxBG_STYLE_PAINT: | |
4899 | case wxBG_STYLE_TRANSPARENT: | |
4900 | // no need to do anything here at all, background will be entirely | |
4901 | // redrawn in WM_PAINT handler | |
4902 | break; | |
4903 | ||
4904 | default: | |
4905 | wxFAIL_MSG( "unknown background style" ); | |
4906 | } | |
4907 | ||
4908 | return true; | |
4909 | } | |
4910 | ||
4911 | #ifdef wxHAS_MSW_BACKGROUND_ERASE_HOOK | |
4912 | ||
4913 | bool wxWindowMSW::MSWHasEraseBgHook() const | |
4914 | { | |
4915 | return gs_eraseBgHooks.find(const_cast<wxWindowMSW *>(this)) | |
4916 | != gs_eraseBgHooks.end(); | |
4917 | } | |
4918 | ||
4919 | void wxWindowMSW::MSWSetEraseBgHook(wxWindow *child) | |
4920 | { | |
4921 | if ( child ) | |
4922 | { | |
4923 | if ( !gs_eraseBgHooks.insert( | |
4924 | EraseBgHooks::value_type(this, child)).second ) | |
4925 | { | |
4926 | wxFAIL_MSG( wxT("Setting erase background hook twice?") ); | |
4927 | } | |
4928 | } | |
4929 | else // reset the hook | |
4930 | { | |
4931 | if ( gs_eraseBgHooks.erase(this) != 1 ) | |
4932 | { | |
4933 | wxFAIL_MSG( wxT("Resetting erase background which was not set?") ); | |
4934 | } | |
4935 | } | |
4936 | } | |
4937 | ||
4938 | #endif // wxHAS_MSW_BACKGROUND_ERASE_HOOK | |
4939 | ||
4940 | bool wxWindowMSW::DoEraseBackground(WXHDC hDC) | |
4941 | { | |
4942 | HBRUSH hbr = (HBRUSH)MSWGetBgBrush(hDC); | |
4943 | if ( !hbr ) | |
4944 | return false; | |
4945 | ||
4946 | // erase just the client area of the window, this is important for the | |
4947 | // frames to avoid drawing over the toolbar part of the window (you might | |
4948 | // think using WS_CLIPCHILDREN would prevent this from happening, but it | |
4949 | // clearly doesn't) | |
4950 | RECT rc; | |
4951 | wxCopyRectToRECT(GetClientRect(), rc); | |
4952 | ::FillRect((HDC)hDC, &rc, hbr); | |
4953 | ||
4954 | return true; | |
4955 | } | |
4956 | ||
4957 | WXHBRUSH | |
4958 | wxWindowMSW::MSWGetBgBrushForChild(WXHDC hDC, wxWindowMSW *child) | |
4959 | { | |
4960 | // Test for the custom background brush first. | |
4961 | WXHBRUSH hbrush = MSWGetCustomBgBrush(); | |
4962 | if ( hbrush ) | |
4963 | { | |
4964 | // We assume that this is either a stipple or hatched brush and not a | |
4965 | // solid one as otherwise it would have been enough to set the | |
4966 | // background colour and such brushes need to be positioned correctly | |
4967 | // in order to align when different windows are painted, so do it here. | |
4968 | RECT rc; | |
4969 | ::GetWindowRect(GetHwndOf(child), &rc); | |
4970 | ||
4971 | ::MapWindowPoints(NULL, GetHwnd(), (POINT *)&rc, 1); | |
4972 | ||
4973 | if ( !::SetBrushOrgEx((HDC)hDC, -rc.left, -rc.top, NULL) ) | |
4974 | { | |
4975 | wxLogLastError(wxT("SetBrushOrgEx(bg brush)")); | |
4976 | } | |
4977 | ||
4978 | return hbrush; | |
4979 | } | |
4980 | ||
4981 | // Otherwise see if we have a custom background colour. | |
4982 | if ( m_hasBgCol ) | |
4983 | { | |
4984 | wxBrush * | |
4985 | brush = wxTheBrushList->FindOrCreateBrush(GetBackgroundColour()); | |
4986 | ||
4987 | return (WXHBRUSH)GetHbrushOf(*brush); | |
4988 | } | |
4989 | ||
4990 | return 0; | |
4991 | } | |
4992 | ||
4993 | WXHBRUSH wxWindowMSW::MSWGetBgBrush(WXHDC hDC) | |
4994 | { | |
4995 | // Use the special wxWindowBeingErased variable if it is set as the child | |
4996 | // being erased. | |
4997 | wxWindowMSW * const child = | |
4998 | #if wxUSE_UXTHEME | |
4999 | wxWindowBeingErased ? wxWindowBeingErased : | |
5000 | #endif | |
5001 | this; | |
5002 | ||
5003 | for ( wxWindowMSW *win = this; win; win = win->GetParent() ) | |
5004 | { | |
5005 | WXHBRUSH hBrush = win->MSWGetBgBrushForChild(hDC, child); | |
5006 | if ( hBrush ) | |
5007 | return hBrush; | |
5008 | ||
5009 | // don't use the parent background if we're not transparent | |
5010 | if ( !win->HasTransparentBackground() ) | |
5011 | break; | |
5012 | ||
5013 | // background is not inherited beyond top level windows | |
5014 | if ( win->IsTopLevel() ) | |
5015 | break; | |
5016 | } | |
5017 | ||
5018 | return 0; | |
5019 | } | |
5020 | ||
5021 | bool wxWindowMSW::HandlePrintClient(WXHDC hDC) | |
5022 | { | |
5023 | // we receive this message when DrawThemeParentBackground() is | |
5024 | // called from def window proc of several controls under XP and we | |
5025 | // must draw properly themed background here | |
5026 | // | |
5027 | // note that naively I'd expect filling the client rect with the | |
5028 | // brush returned by MSWGetBgBrush() work -- but for some reason it | |
5029 | // doesn't and we have to call parents MSWPrintChild() which is | |
5030 | // supposed to call DrawThemeBackground() with appropriate params | |
5031 | // | |
5032 | // also note that in this case lParam == PRF_CLIENT but we're | |
5033 | // clearly expected to paint the background and nothing else! | |
5034 | ||
5035 | if ( IsTopLevel() || InheritsBackgroundColour() ) | |
5036 | return false; | |
5037 | ||
5038 | // sometimes we don't want the parent to handle it at all, instead | |
5039 | // return whatever value this window wants | |
5040 | if ( !MSWShouldPropagatePrintChild() ) | |
5041 | return MSWPrintChild(hDC, (wxWindow *)this); | |
5042 | ||
5043 | for ( wxWindow *win = GetParent(); win; win = win->GetParent() ) | |
5044 | { | |
5045 | if ( win->MSWPrintChild(hDC, (wxWindow *)this) ) | |
5046 | return true; | |
5047 | ||
5048 | if ( win->IsTopLevel() || win->InheritsBackgroundColour() ) | |
5049 | break; | |
5050 | } | |
5051 | ||
5052 | return false; | |
5053 | } | |
5054 | ||
5055 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
5056 | // moving and resizing | |
5057 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
5058 | ||
5059 | bool wxWindowMSW::HandleMinimize() | |
5060 | { | |
5061 | wxIconizeEvent event(m_windowId); | |
5062 | event.SetEventObject(this); | |
5063 | ||
5064 | return HandleWindowEvent(event); | |
5065 | } | |
5066 | ||
5067 | bool wxWindowMSW::HandleMaximize() | |
5068 | { | |
5069 | wxMaximizeEvent event(m_windowId); | |
5070 | event.SetEventObject(this); | |
5071 | ||
5072 | return HandleWindowEvent(event); | |
5073 | } | |
5074 | ||
5075 | bool wxWindowMSW::HandleMove(int x, int y) | |
5076 | { | |
5077 | wxPoint point(x,y); | |
5078 | wxMoveEvent event(point, m_windowId); | |
5079 | event.SetEventObject(this); | |
5080 | ||
5081 | return HandleWindowEvent(event); | |
5082 | } | |
5083 | ||
5084 | bool wxWindowMSW::HandleMoving(wxRect& rect) | |
5085 | { | |
5086 | wxMoveEvent event(rect, m_windowId); | |
5087 | event.SetEventObject(this); | |
5088 | ||
5089 | bool rc = HandleWindowEvent(event); | |
5090 | if (rc) | |
5091 | rect = event.GetRect(); | |
5092 | return rc; | |
5093 | } | |
5094 | ||
5095 | bool wxWindowMSW::HandleEnterSizeMove() | |
5096 | { | |
5097 | wxMoveEvent event(wxPoint(0,0), m_windowId); | |
5098 | event.SetEventType(wxEVT_MOVE_START); | |
5099 | event.SetEventObject(this); | |
5100 | ||
5101 | return HandleWindowEvent(event); | |
5102 | } | |
5103 | ||
5104 | bool wxWindowMSW::HandleExitSizeMove() | |
5105 | { | |
5106 | wxMoveEvent event(wxPoint(0,0), m_windowId); | |
5107 | event.SetEventType(wxEVT_MOVE_END); | |
5108 | event.SetEventObject(this); | |
5109 | ||
5110 | return HandleWindowEvent(event); | |
5111 | } | |
5112 | ||
5113 | bool wxWindowMSW::HandleSize(int WXUNUSED(w), int WXUNUSED(h), WXUINT wParam) | |
5114 | { | |
5115 | #if wxUSE_DEFERRED_SIZING | |
5116 | // when we resize this window, its children are probably going to be | |
5117 | // repositioned as well, prepare to use DeferWindowPos() for them | |
5118 | int numChildren = 0; | |
5119 | for ( HWND child = ::GetWindow(GetHwndOf(this), GW_CHILD); | |
5120 | child; | |
5121 | child = ::GetWindow(child, GW_HWNDNEXT) ) | |
5122 | { | |
5123 | numChildren ++; | |
5124 | } | |
5125 | ||
5126 | // Protect against valid m_hDWP being overwritten | |
5127 | bool useDefer = false; | |
5128 | ||
5129 | if ( numChildren > 1 ) | |
5130 | { | |
5131 | if (!m_hDWP) | |
5132 | { | |
5133 | m_hDWP = (WXHANDLE)::BeginDeferWindowPos(numChildren); | |
5134 | if ( !m_hDWP ) | |
5135 | { | |
5136 | wxLogLastError(wxT("BeginDeferWindowPos")); | |
5137 | } | |
5138 | if (m_hDWP) | |
5139 | useDefer = true; | |
5140 | } | |
5141 | } | |
5142 | #endif // wxUSE_DEFERRED_SIZING | |
5143 | ||
5144 | // update this window size | |
5145 | bool processed = false; | |
5146 | switch ( wParam ) | |
5147 | { | |
5148 | default: | |
5149 | wxFAIL_MSG( wxT("unexpected WM_SIZE parameter") ); | |
5150 | // fall through nevertheless | |
5151 | ||
5152 | case SIZE_MAXHIDE: | |
5153 | case SIZE_MAXSHOW: | |
5154 | // we're not interested in these messages at all | |
5155 | break; | |
5156 | ||
5157 | case SIZE_MINIMIZED: | |
5158 | processed = HandleMinimize(); | |
5159 | break; | |
5160 | ||
5161 | case SIZE_MAXIMIZED: | |
5162 | /* processed = */ HandleMaximize(); | |
5163 | // fall through to send a normal size event as well | |
5164 | ||
5165 | case SIZE_RESTORED: | |
5166 | // don't use w and h parameters as they specify the client size | |
5167 | // while according to the docs EVT_SIZE handler is supposed to | |
5168 | // receive the total size | |
5169 | wxSizeEvent event(GetSize(), m_windowId); | |
5170 | event.SetEventObject(this); | |
5171 | ||
5172 | processed = HandleWindowEvent(event); | |
5173 | } | |
5174 | ||
5175 | #if wxUSE_DEFERRED_SIZING | |
5176 | // and finally change the positions of all child windows at once | |
5177 | if ( useDefer && m_hDWP ) | |
5178 | { | |
5179 | // reset m_hDWP to NULL so that child windows don't try to use our | |
5180 | // m_hDWP after we call EndDeferWindowPos() on it (this shouldn't | |
5181 | // happen anyhow normally but who knows what weird flow of control we | |
5182 | // may have depending on what the users EVT_SIZE handler does...) | |
5183 | HDWP hDWP = (HDWP)m_hDWP; | |
5184 | m_hDWP = NULL; | |
5185 | ||
5186 | // do put all child controls in place at once | |
5187 | if ( !::EndDeferWindowPos(hDWP) ) | |
5188 | { | |
5189 | wxLogLastError(wxT("EndDeferWindowPos")); | |
5190 | } | |
5191 | ||
5192 | // Reset our children's pending pos/size values. | |
5193 | for ( wxWindowList::compatibility_iterator node = GetChildren().GetFirst(); | |
5194 | node; | |
5195 | node = node->GetNext() ) | |
5196 | { | |
5197 | wxWindowMSW * const child = node->GetData(); | |
5198 | child->MSWEndDeferWindowPos(); | |
5199 | } | |
5200 | } | |
5201 | #endif // wxUSE_DEFERRED_SIZING | |
5202 | ||
5203 | return processed; | |
5204 | } | |
5205 | ||
5206 | bool wxWindowMSW::HandleSizing(wxRect& rect) | |
5207 | { | |
5208 | wxSizeEvent event(rect, m_windowId); | |
5209 | event.SetEventObject(this); | |
5210 | ||
5211 | bool rc = HandleWindowEvent(event); | |
5212 | if (rc) | |
5213 | rect = event.GetRect(); | |
5214 | return rc; | |
5215 | } | |
5216 | ||
5217 | bool wxWindowMSW::HandleGetMinMaxInfo(void *WXUNUSED_IN_WINCE(mmInfo)) | |
5218 | { | |
5219 | #ifdef __WXWINCE__ | |
5220 | return false; | |
5221 | #else | |
5222 | MINMAXINFO *info = (MINMAXINFO *)mmInfo; | |
5223 | ||
5224 | bool rc = false; | |
5225 | ||
5226 | int minWidth = GetMinWidth(), | |
5227 | minHeight = GetMinHeight(), | |
5228 | maxWidth = GetMaxWidth(), | |
5229 | maxHeight = GetMaxHeight(); | |
5230 | ||
5231 | if ( minWidth != wxDefaultCoord ) | |
5232 | { | |
5233 | info->ptMinTrackSize.x = minWidth; | |
5234 | rc = true; | |
5235 | } | |
5236 | ||
5237 | if ( minHeight != wxDefaultCoord ) | |
5238 | { | |
5239 | info->ptMinTrackSize.y = minHeight; | |
5240 | rc = true; | |
5241 | } | |
5242 | ||
5243 | if ( maxWidth != wxDefaultCoord ) | |
5244 | { | |
5245 | info->ptMaxTrackSize.x = maxWidth; | |
5246 | rc = true; | |
5247 | } | |
5248 | ||
5249 | if ( maxHeight != wxDefaultCoord ) | |
5250 | { | |
5251 | info->ptMaxTrackSize.y = maxHeight; | |
5252 | rc = true; | |
5253 | } | |
5254 | ||
5255 | return rc; | |
5256 | #endif | |
5257 | } | |
5258 | ||
5259 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
5260 | // command messages | |
5261 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
5262 | ||
5263 | bool wxWindowMSW::HandleCommand(WXWORD id_, WXWORD cmd, WXHWND control) | |
5264 | { | |
5265 | // sign extend to int from short before comparing with the other int ids | |
5266 | int id = (signed short)id_; | |
5267 | ||
5268 | #if wxUSE_MENUS_NATIVE | |
5269 | if ( !cmd && wxCurrentPopupMenu ) | |
5270 | { | |
5271 | wxMenu *popupMenu = wxCurrentPopupMenu; | |
5272 | wxCurrentPopupMenu = NULL; | |
5273 | ||
5274 | return popupMenu->MSWCommand(cmd, id); | |
5275 | } | |
5276 | #endif // wxUSE_MENUS_NATIVE | |
5277 | ||
5278 | wxWindow *win = NULL; | |
5279 | ||
5280 | // first try to find it from HWND - this works even with the broken | |
5281 | // programs using the same ids for different controls | |
5282 | if ( control ) | |
5283 | { | |
5284 | win = wxFindWinFromHandle(control); | |
5285 | } | |
5286 | ||
5287 | // try the id | |
5288 | if ( !win ) | |
5289 | { | |
5290 | win = FindItem(id); | |
5291 | } | |
5292 | ||
5293 | if ( win ) | |
5294 | { | |
5295 | return win->MSWCommand(cmd, id); | |
5296 | } | |
5297 | ||
5298 | // the messages sent from the in-place edit control used by the treectrl | |
5299 | // for label editing have id == 0, but they should _not_ be treated as menu | |
5300 | // messages (they are EN_XXX ones, in fact) so don't translate anything | |
5301 | // coming from a control to wxEVT_COMMAND_MENU_SELECTED | |
5302 | if ( !control ) | |
5303 | { | |
5304 | wxCommandEvent event(wxEVT_COMMAND_MENU_SELECTED, id); | |
5305 | event.SetEventObject(this); | |
5306 | event.SetInt(id); | |
5307 | ||
5308 | return HandleWindowEvent(event); | |
5309 | } | |
5310 | else | |
5311 | { | |
5312 | #if wxUSE_SPINCTRL && !defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__) | |
5313 | // the text ctrl which is logically part of wxSpinCtrl sends WM_COMMAND | |
5314 | // notifications to its parent which we want to reflect back to | |
5315 | // wxSpinCtrl | |
5316 | wxSpinCtrl *spin = wxSpinCtrl::GetSpinForTextCtrl(control); | |
5317 | if ( spin && spin->ProcessTextCommand(cmd, id) ) | |
5318 | return true; | |
5319 | #endif // wxUSE_SPINCTRL | |
5320 | ||
5321 | #if wxUSE_CHOICE && defined(__SMARTPHONE__) | |
5322 | // the listbox ctrl which is logically part of wxChoice sends WM_COMMAND | |
5323 | // notifications to its parent which we want to reflect back to | |
5324 | // wxChoice | |
5325 | wxChoice *choice = wxChoice::GetChoiceForListBox(control); | |
5326 | if ( choice && choice->MSWCommand(cmd, id) ) | |
5327 | return true; | |
5328 | #endif | |
5329 | } | |
5330 | ||
5331 | return false; | |
5332 | } | |
5333 | ||
5334 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
5335 | // mouse events | |
5336 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
5337 | ||
5338 | void wxWindowMSW::InitMouseEvent(wxMouseEvent& event, | |
5339 | int x, int y, | |
5340 | WXUINT flags) | |
5341 | { | |
5342 | // our client coords are not quite the same as Windows ones | |
5343 | wxPoint pt = GetClientAreaOrigin(); | |
5344 | event.m_x = x - pt.x; | |
5345 | event.m_y = y - pt.y; | |
5346 | ||
5347 | event.m_shiftDown = (flags & MK_SHIFT) != 0; | |
5348 | event.m_controlDown = (flags & MK_CONTROL) != 0; | |
5349 | event.m_leftDown = (flags & MK_LBUTTON) != 0; | |
5350 | event.m_middleDown = (flags & MK_MBUTTON) != 0; | |
5351 | event.m_rightDown = (flags & MK_RBUTTON) != 0; | |
5352 | #ifdef wxHAS_XBUTTON | |
5353 | event.m_aux1Down = (flags & MK_XBUTTON1) != 0; | |
5354 | event.m_aux2Down = (flags & MK_XBUTTON2) != 0; | |
5355 | #endif // wxHAS_XBUTTON | |
5356 | event.m_altDown = ::wxIsAltDown(); | |
5357 | ||
5358 | #ifndef __WXWINCE__ | |
5359 | event.SetTimestamp(::GetMessageTime()); | |
5360 | #endif | |
5361 | ||
5362 | event.SetEventObject(this); | |
5363 | event.SetId(GetId()); | |
5364 | ||
5365 | #if wxUSE_MOUSEEVENT_HACK | |
5366 | gs_lastMouseEvent.pos = ClientToScreen(wxPoint(x, y)); | |
5367 | gs_lastMouseEvent.type = event.GetEventType(); | |
5368 | #endif // wxUSE_MOUSEEVENT_HACK | |
5369 | } | |
5370 | ||
5371 | #ifdef __WXWINCE__ | |
5372 | // Windows doesn't send the mouse events to the static controls (which are | |
5373 | // transparent in the sense that their WM_NCHITTEST handler returns | |
5374 | // HTTRANSPARENT) at all but we want all controls to receive the mouse events | |
5375 | // and so we manually check if we don't have a child window under mouse and if | |
5376 | // we do, send the event to it instead of the window Windows had sent WM_XXX | |
5377 | // to. | |
5378 | // | |
5379 | // Notice that this is not done for the mouse move events because this could | |
5380 | // (would?) be too slow, but only for clicks which means that the static texts | |
5381 | // still don't get move, enter nor leave events. | |
5382 | static wxWindowMSW *FindWindowForMouseEvent(wxWindowMSW *win, int *x, int *y) | |
5383 | { | |
5384 | wxCHECK_MSG( x && y, win, wxT("NULL pointer in FindWindowForMouseEvent") ); | |
5385 | ||
5386 | // first try to find a non transparent child: this allows us to send events | |
5387 | // to a static text which is inside a static box, for example | |
5388 | POINT pt = { *x, *y }; | |
5389 | HWND hwnd = GetHwndOf(win), | |
5390 | hwndUnderMouse; | |
5391 | ||
5392 | #ifdef __WXWINCE__ | |
5393 | hwndUnderMouse = ::ChildWindowFromPoint | |
5394 | ( | |
5395 | hwnd, | |
5396 | pt | |
5397 | ); | |
5398 | #else | |
5399 | hwndUnderMouse = ::ChildWindowFromPointEx | |
5400 | ( | |
5401 | hwnd, | |
5402 | pt, | |
5403 | CWP_SKIPINVISIBLE | | |
5404 | CWP_SKIPDISABLED | | |
5405 | CWP_SKIPTRANSPARENT | |
5406 | ); | |
5407 | #endif | |
5408 | ||
5409 | if ( !hwndUnderMouse || hwndUnderMouse == hwnd ) | |
5410 | { | |
5411 | // now try any child window at all | |
5412 | hwndUnderMouse = ::ChildWindowFromPoint(hwnd, pt); | |
5413 | } | |
5414 | ||
5415 | // check that we have a child window which is susceptible to receive mouse | |
5416 | // events: for this it must be shown and enabled | |
5417 | if ( hwndUnderMouse && | |
5418 | hwndUnderMouse != hwnd && | |
5419 | ::IsWindowVisible(hwndUnderMouse) && | |
5420 | ::IsWindowEnabled(hwndUnderMouse) ) | |
5421 | { | |
5422 | wxWindow *winUnderMouse = wxFindWinFromHandle(hwndUnderMouse); | |
5423 | if ( winUnderMouse ) | |
5424 | { | |
5425 | // translate the mouse coords to the other window coords | |
5426 | win->ClientToScreen(x, y); | |
5427 | winUnderMouse->ScreenToClient(x, y); | |
5428 | ||
5429 | win = winUnderMouse; | |
5430 | } | |
5431 | } | |
5432 | ||
5433 | return win; | |
5434 | } | |
5435 | #endif // __WXWINCE__ | |
5436 | ||
5437 | bool wxWindowMSW::HandleMouseEvent(WXUINT msg, int x, int y, WXUINT flags) | |
5438 | { | |
5439 | // the mouse events take consecutive IDs from WM_MOUSEFIRST to | |
5440 | // WM_MOUSELAST, so it's enough to subtract WM_MOUSEMOVE == WM_MOUSEFIRST | |
5441 | // from the message id and take the value in the table to get wxWin event | |
5442 | // id | |
5443 | static const wxEventType eventsMouse[] = | |
5444 | { | |
5445 | wxEVT_MOTION, | |
5446 | wxEVT_LEFT_DOWN, | |
5447 | wxEVT_LEFT_UP, | |
5448 | wxEVT_LEFT_DCLICK, | |
5449 | wxEVT_RIGHT_DOWN, | |
5450 | wxEVT_RIGHT_UP, | |
5451 | wxEVT_RIGHT_DCLICK, | |
5452 | wxEVT_MIDDLE_DOWN, | |
5453 | wxEVT_MIDDLE_UP, | |
5454 | wxEVT_MIDDLE_DCLICK, | |
5455 | 0, // this one is for wxEVT_MOTION which is not used here | |
5456 | wxEVT_AUX1_DOWN, | |
5457 | wxEVT_AUX1_UP, | |
5458 | wxEVT_AUX1_DCLICK, | |
5459 | wxEVT_AUX2_DOWN, | |
5460 | wxEVT_AUX2_UP, | |
5461 | wxEVT_AUX2_DCLICK | |
5462 | }; | |
5463 | ||
5464 | #ifdef wxHAS_XBUTTON | |
5465 | // the same messages are used for both auxillary mouse buttons so we need | |
5466 | // to adjust the index manually | |
5467 | switch ( msg ) | |
5468 | { | |
5469 | case WM_XBUTTONDOWN: | |
5470 | case WM_XBUTTONUP: | |
5471 | case WM_XBUTTONDBLCLK: | |
5472 | if ( flags & MK_XBUTTON2 ) | |
5473 | msg += wxEVT_AUX2_DOWN - wxEVT_AUX1_DOWN; | |
5474 | } | |
5475 | #endif // wxHAS_XBUTTON | |
5476 | ||
5477 | wxMouseEvent event(eventsMouse[msg - WM_MOUSEMOVE]); | |
5478 | InitMouseEvent(event, x, y, flags); | |
5479 | ||
5480 | return HandleWindowEvent(event); | |
5481 | } | |
5482 | ||
5483 | bool wxWindowMSW::HandleMouseMove(int x, int y, WXUINT flags) | |
5484 | { | |
5485 | if ( !m_mouseInWindow ) | |
5486 | { | |
5487 | // it would be wrong to assume that just because we get a mouse move | |
5488 | // event that the mouse is inside the window: although this is usually | |
5489 | // true, it is not if we had captured the mouse, so we need to check | |
5490 | // the mouse coordinates here | |
5491 | if ( !HasCapture() || IsMouseInWindow() ) | |
5492 | { | |
5493 | // Generate an ENTER event | |
5494 | m_mouseInWindow = true; | |
5495 | ||
5496 | #ifdef HAVE_TRACKMOUSEEVENT | |
5497 | typedef BOOL (WINAPI *_TrackMouseEvent_t)(LPTRACKMOUSEEVENT); | |
5498 | #ifdef __WXWINCE__ | |
5499 | static const _TrackMouseEvent_t | |
5500 | s_pfn_TrackMouseEvent = _TrackMouseEvent; | |
5501 | #else // !__WXWINCE__ | |
5502 | static _TrackMouseEvent_t s_pfn_TrackMouseEvent; | |
5503 | static bool s_initDone = false; | |
5504 | if ( !s_initDone ) | |
5505 | { | |
5506 | // see comment in wxApp::GetComCtl32Version() explaining the | |
5507 | // use of wxLoadedDLL | |
5508 | wxLoadedDLL dllComCtl32(wxT("comctl32.dll")); | |
5509 | if ( dllComCtl32.IsLoaded() ) | |
5510 | { | |
5511 | s_pfn_TrackMouseEvent = (_TrackMouseEvent_t) | |
5512 | dllComCtl32.RawGetSymbol(wxT("_TrackMouseEvent")); | |
5513 | } | |
5514 | ||
5515 | s_initDone = true; | |
5516 | } | |
5517 | ||
5518 | if ( s_pfn_TrackMouseEvent ) | |
5519 | #endif // __WXWINCE__/!__WXWINCE__ | |
5520 | { | |
5521 | WinStruct<TRACKMOUSEEVENT> trackinfo; | |
5522 | ||
5523 | trackinfo.dwFlags = TME_LEAVE; | |
5524 | trackinfo.hwndTrack = GetHwnd(); | |
5525 | ||
5526 | (*s_pfn_TrackMouseEvent)(&trackinfo); | |
5527 | } | |
5528 | #endif // HAVE_TRACKMOUSEEVENT | |
5529 | ||
5530 | wxMouseEvent event(wxEVT_ENTER_WINDOW); | |
5531 | InitMouseEvent(event, x, y, flags); | |
5532 | ||
5533 | (void)HandleWindowEvent(event); | |
5534 | } | |
5535 | } | |
5536 | #ifdef HAVE_TRACKMOUSEEVENT | |
5537 | else // mouse not in window | |
5538 | { | |
5539 | // Check if we need to send a LEAVE event | |
5540 | // Windows doesn't send WM_MOUSELEAVE if the mouse has been captured so | |
5541 | // send it here if we are using native mouse leave tracking | |
5542 | if ( HasCapture() && !IsMouseInWindow() ) | |
5543 | { | |
5544 | GenerateMouseLeave(); | |
5545 | } | |
5546 | } | |
5547 | #endif // HAVE_TRACKMOUSEEVENT | |
5548 | ||
5549 | #if wxUSE_MOUSEEVENT_HACK | |
5550 | // Windows often generates mouse events even if mouse position hasn't | |
5551 | // changed (http://article.gmane.org/gmane.comp.lib.wxwidgets.devel/66576) | |
5552 | // | |
5553 | // Filter this out as it can result in unexpected behaviour compared to | |
5554 | // other platforms | |
5555 | if ( gs_lastMouseEvent.type == wxEVT_RIGHT_DOWN || | |
5556 | gs_lastMouseEvent.type == wxEVT_LEFT_DOWN || | |
5557 | gs_lastMouseEvent.type == wxEVT_MIDDLE_DOWN || | |
5558 | gs_lastMouseEvent.type == wxEVT_MOTION ) | |
5559 | { | |
5560 | if ( ClientToScreen(wxPoint(x, y)) == gs_lastMouseEvent.pos ) | |
5561 | { | |
5562 | gs_lastMouseEvent.type = wxEVT_MOTION; | |
5563 | ||
5564 | return false; | |
5565 | } | |
5566 | } | |
5567 | #endif // wxUSE_MOUSEEVENT_HACK | |
5568 | ||
5569 | return HandleMouseEvent(WM_MOUSEMOVE, x, y, flags); | |
5570 | } | |
5571 | ||
5572 | ||
5573 | bool wxWindowMSW::HandleMouseWheel(WXWPARAM wParam, WXLPARAM lParam) | |
5574 | { | |
5575 | #if wxUSE_MOUSEWHEEL | |
5576 | // notice that WM_MOUSEWHEEL position is in screen coords (as it's | |
5577 | // forwarded up to the parent by DefWindowProc()) and not in the client | |
5578 | // ones as all the other messages, translate them to the client coords for | |
5579 | // consistency | |
5580 | const wxPoint | |
5581 | pt = ScreenToClient(wxPoint(GET_X_LPARAM(lParam), GET_Y_LPARAM(lParam))); | |
5582 | wxMouseEvent event(wxEVT_MOUSEWHEEL); | |
5583 | InitMouseEvent(event, pt.x, pt.y, LOWORD(wParam)); | |
5584 | event.m_wheelRotation = (short)HIWORD(wParam); | |
5585 | event.m_wheelDelta = WHEEL_DELTA; | |
5586 | ||
5587 | static int s_linesPerRotation = -1; | |
5588 | if ( s_linesPerRotation == -1 ) | |
5589 | { | |
5590 | if ( !::SystemParametersInfo(SPI_GETWHEELSCROLLLINES, 0, | |
5591 | &s_linesPerRotation, 0)) | |
5592 | { | |
5593 | // this is not supposed to happen | |
5594 | wxLogLastError(wxT("SystemParametersInfo(GETWHEELSCROLLLINES)")); | |
5595 | ||
5596 | // the default is 3, so use it if SystemParametersInfo() failed | |
5597 | s_linesPerRotation = 3; | |
5598 | } | |
5599 | } | |
5600 | ||
5601 | event.m_linesPerAction = s_linesPerRotation; | |
5602 | return HandleWindowEvent(event); | |
5603 | ||
5604 | #else // !wxUSE_MOUSEWHEEL | |
5605 | wxUnusedVar(wParam); | |
5606 | wxUnusedVar(lParam); | |
5607 | ||
5608 | return false; | |
5609 | #endif // wxUSE_MOUSEWHEEL/!wxUSE_MOUSEWHEEL | |
5610 | } | |
5611 | ||
5612 | void wxWindowMSW::GenerateMouseLeave() | |
5613 | { | |
5614 | m_mouseInWindow = false; | |
5615 | ||
5616 | int state = 0; | |
5617 | if ( wxIsShiftDown() ) | |
5618 | state |= MK_SHIFT; | |
5619 | if ( wxIsCtrlDown() ) | |
5620 | state |= MK_CONTROL; | |
5621 | ||
5622 | // Only the high-order bit should be tested | |
5623 | if ( GetKeyState( VK_LBUTTON ) & (1<<15) ) | |
5624 | state |= MK_LBUTTON; | |
5625 | if ( GetKeyState( VK_MBUTTON ) & (1<<15) ) | |
5626 | state |= MK_MBUTTON; | |
5627 | if ( GetKeyState( VK_RBUTTON ) & (1<<15) ) | |
5628 | state |= MK_RBUTTON; | |
5629 | ||
5630 | POINT pt; | |
5631 | #ifdef __WXWINCE__ | |
5632 | if ( !::GetCursorPosWinCE(&pt) ) | |
5633 | #else | |
5634 | if ( !::GetCursorPos(&pt) ) | |
5635 | #endif | |
5636 | { | |
5637 | wxLogLastError(wxT("GetCursorPos")); | |
5638 | } | |
5639 | ||
5640 | // we need to have client coordinates here for symmetry with | |
5641 | // wxEVT_ENTER_WINDOW | |
5642 | RECT rect = wxGetWindowRect(GetHwnd()); | |
5643 | pt.x -= rect.left; | |
5644 | pt.y -= rect.top; | |
5645 | ||
5646 | wxMouseEvent event(wxEVT_LEAVE_WINDOW); | |
5647 | InitMouseEvent(event, pt.x, pt.y, state); | |
5648 | ||
5649 | (void)HandleWindowEvent(event); | |
5650 | } | |
5651 | ||
5652 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
5653 | // keyboard handling | |
5654 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
5655 | ||
5656 | namespace | |
5657 | { | |
5658 | ||
5659 | // Implementation of InitAnyKeyEvent() which can also be used when there is no | |
5660 | // associated window: this can happen for the wxEVT_CHAR_HOOK events created by | |
5661 | // the global keyboard hook (e.g. the event might have happened in a non-wx | |
5662 | // window). | |
5663 | void | |
5664 | MSWInitAnyKeyEvent(wxKeyEvent& event, | |
5665 | WXWPARAM wParam, | |
5666 | WXLPARAM lParam, | |
5667 | const wxWindowBase *win /* may be NULL */) | |
5668 | { | |
5669 | if ( win ) | |
5670 | { | |
5671 | event.SetId(win->GetId()); | |
5672 | event.SetEventObject(const_cast<wxWindowBase *>(win)); | |
5673 | } | |
5674 | else // No associated window. | |
5675 | { | |
5676 | // Use wxID_ANY for compatibility with the old code even if wxID_NONE | |
5677 | // would arguably make more sense. | |
5678 | event.SetId(wxID_ANY); | |
5679 | } | |
5680 | ||
5681 | event.m_shiftDown = wxIsShiftDown(); | |
5682 | event.m_controlDown = wxIsCtrlDown(); | |
5683 | event.m_altDown = (HIWORD(lParam) & KF_ALTDOWN) == KF_ALTDOWN; | |
5684 | ||
5685 | event.m_rawCode = (wxUint32) wParam; | |
5686 | event.m_rawFlags = (wxUint32) lParam; | |
5687 | #ifndef __WXWINCE__ | |
5688 | event.SetTimestamp(::GetMessageTime()); | |
5689 | #endif | |
5690 | ||
5691 | // Event coordinates must be in window client coordinates system which | |
5692 | // doesn't make sense if there is no window. | |
5693 | // | |
5694 | // We could use screen coordinates for such events but this would make the | |
5695 | // logic of the event handlers more complicated: you'd need to test for the | |
5696 | // event object and interpret the coordinates differently according to | |
5697 | // whether it's NULL or not so unless somebody really asks for this let's | |
5698 | // just avoid the issue. | |
5699 | if ( win ) | |
5700 | { | |
5701 | const wxPoint mousePos = win->ScreenToClient(wxGetMousePosition()); | |
5702 | event.m_x = mousePos.x; | |
5703 | event.m_y = mousePos.y; | |
5704 | } | |
5705 | } | |
5706 | ||
5707 | } // anonymous namespace | |
5708 | ||
5709 | void | |
5710 | wxWindowMSW::InitAnyKeyEvent(wxKeyEvent& event, | |
5711 | WXWPARAM wParam, | |
5712 | WXLPARAM lParam) const | |
5713 | { | |
5714 | MSWInitAnyKeyEvent(event, wParam, lParam, this); | |
5715 | } | |
5716 | ||
5717 | wxKeyEvent | |
5718 | wxWindowMSW::CreateKeyEvent(wxEventType evType, | |
5719 | WXWPARAM wParam, | |
5720 | WXLPARAM lParam) const | |
5721 | { | |
5722 | // Catch any attempts to use this with WM_CHAR, it wouldn't work because | |
5723 | // wParam is supposed to be a virtual key and not a character here. | |
5724 | wxASSERT_MSG( evType != wxEVT_CHAR && evType != wxEVT_CHAR_HOOK, | |
5725 | "CreateKeyEvent() can't be used for char events" ); | |
5726 | ||
5727 | wxKeyEvent event(evType); | |
5728 | InitAnyKeyEvent(event, wParam, lParam); | |
5729 | ||
5730 | event.m_keyCode = wxMSWKeyboard::VKToWX | |
5731 | ( | |
5732 | wParam, | |
5733 | lParam | |
5734 | #if wxUSE_UNICODE | |
5735 | , &event.m_uniChar | |
5736 | #endif // wxUSE_UNICODE | |
5737 | ); | |
5738 | ||
5739 | return event; | |
5740 | } | |
5741 | ||
5742 | wxKeyEvent | |
5743 | wxWindowMSW::CreateCharEvent(wxEventType evType, | |
5744 | WXWPARAM wParam, | |
5745 | WXLPARAM lParam) const | |
5746 | { | |
5747 | wxKeyEvent event(evType); | |
5748 | InitAnyKeyEvent(event, wParam, lParam); | |
5749 | ||
5750 | #if wxUSE_UNICODE | |
5751 | // TODO: wParam uses UTF-16 so this is incorrect for characters outside of | |
5752 | // the BMP, we should use WM_UNICHAR to handle them. | |
5753 | event.m_uniChar = wParam; | |
5754 | #endif // wxUSE_UNICODE | |
5755 | ||
5756 | // Set non-Unicode key code too for compatibility if possible. | |
5757 | if ( wParam < 0x80 ) | |
5758 | { | |
5759 | // It's an ASCII character, no need to translate it. | |
5760 | event.m_keyCode = wParam; | |
5761 | } | |
5762 | else | |
5763 | { | |
5764 | // Check if this key can be represented (as a single character) in the | |
5765 | // current locale. | |
5766 | const wchar_t wc = wParam; | |
5767 | char ch; | |
5768 | if ( wxConvLibc.FromWChar(&ch, 1, &wc, 1) != wxCONV_FAILED ) | |
5769 | { | |
5770 | // For compatibility continue to provide the key code in this field | |
5771 | // even though using GetUnicodeKey() is recommended now. | |
5772 | event.m_keyCode = static_cast<unsigned char>(ch); | |
5773 | } | |
5774 | //else: Key can't be represented in the current locale, leave m_keyCode | |
5775 | // as WXK_NONE and use GetUnicodeKey() to access the character. | |
5776 | } | |
5777 | ||
5778 | // the alphanumeric keys produced by pressing AltGr+something on European | |
5779 | // keyboards have both Ctrl and Alt modifiers which may confuse the user | |
5780 | // code as, normally, keys with Ctrl and/or Alt don't result in anything | |
5781 | // alphanumeric, so pretend that there are no modifiers at all (the | |
5782 | // KEY_DOWN event would still have the correct modifiers if they're really | |
5783 | // needed) | |
5784 | if ( event.m_controlDown && event.m_altDown && | |
5785 | (event.m_keyCode >= 32 && event.m_keyCode < 256) ) | |
5786 | { | |
5787 | event.m_controlDown = | |
5788 | event.m_altDown = false; | |
5789 | } | |
5790 | ||
5791 | return event; | |
5792 | } | |
5793 | ||
5794 | // isASCII is true only when we're called from WM_CHAR handler and not from | |
5795 | // WM_KEYDOWN one | |
5796 | bool wxWindowMSW::HandleChar(WXWPARAM wParam, WXLPARAM lParam) | |
5797 | { | |
5798 | wxKeyEvent event(CreateCharEvent(wxEVT_CHAR, wParam, lParam)); | |
5799 | return HandleWindowEvent(event); | |
5800 | } | |
5801 | ||
5802 | bool wxWindowMSW::HandleKeyDown(WXWPARAM wParam, WXLPARAM lParam) | |
5803 | { | |
5804 | wxKeyEvent event(CreateKeyEvent(wxEVT_KEY_DOWN, wParam, lParam)); | |
5805 | return HandleWindowEvent(event); | |
5806 | } | |
5807 | ||
5808 | bool wxWindowMSW::HandleKeyUp(WXWPARAM wParam, WXLPARAM lParam) | |
5809 | { | |
5810 | wxKeyEvent event(CreateKeyEvent(wxEVT_KEY_UP, wParam, lParam)); | |
5811 | return HandleWindowEvent(event); | |
5812 | } | |
5813 | ||
5814 | #if wxUSE_MENUS | |
5815 | int wxWindowMSW::HandleMenuChar(int WXUNUSED_IN_WINCE(chAccel), | |
5816 | WXLPARAM WXUNUSED_IN_WINCE(lParam)) | |
5817 | { | |
5818 | // FIXME: implement GetMenuItemCount for WinCE, possibly | |
5819 | // in terms of GetMenuItemInfo | |
5820 | #ifndef __WXWINCE__ | |
5821 | const HMENU hmenu = (HMENU)lParam; | |
5822 | ||
5823 | MENUITEMINFO mii; | |
5824 | wxZeroMemory(mii); | |
5825 | mii.cbSize = sizeof(MENUITEMINFO); | |
5826 | ||
5827 | // we could use MIIM_FTYPE here as we only need to know if the item is | |
5828 | // ownerdrawn or not and not dwTypeData which MIIM_TYPE also returns, but | |
5829 | // MIIM_FTYPE is not supported under Win95 | |
5830 | mii.fMask = MIIM_TYPE | MIIM_DATA; | |
5831 | ||
5832 | // find if we have this letter in any owner drawn item | |
5833 | const int count = ::GetMenuItemCount(hmenu); | |
5834 | for ( int i = 0; i < count; i++ ) | |
5835 | { | |
5836 | // previous loop iteration could modify it, reset it back before | |
5837 | // calling GetMenuItemInfo() to prevent it from overflowing dwTypeData | |
5838 | mii.cch = 0; | |
5839 | ||
5840 | if ( ::GetMenuItemInfo(hmenu, i, TRUE, &mii) ) | |
5841 | { | |
5842 | if ( mii.fType == MFT_OWNERDRAW ) | |
5843 | { | |
5844 | // dwItemData member of the MENUITEMINFO is a | |
5845 | // pointer to the associated wxMenuItem -- see the | |
5846 | // menu creation code | |
5847 | wxMenuItem *item = (wxMenuItem*)mii.dwItemData; | |
5848 | ||
5849 | const wxString label(item->GetItemLabel()); | |
5850 | const wxChar *p = wxStrchr(label.wx_str(), wxT('&')); | |
5851 | while ( p++ ) | |
5852 | { | |
5853 | if ( *p == wxT('&') ) | |
5854 | { | |
5855 | // this is not the accel char, find the real one | |
5856 | p = wxStrchr(p + 1, wxT('&')); | |
5857 | } | |
5858 | else // got the accel char | |
5859 | { | |
5860 | // FIXME-UNICODE: this comparison doesn't risk to work | |
5861 | // for non ASCII accelerator characters I'm afraid, but | |
5862 | // what can we do? | |
5863 | if ( (wchar_t)wxToupper(*p) == (wchar_t)chAccel ) | |
5864 | { | |
5865 | return i; | |
5866 | } | |
5867 | else | |
5868 | { | |
5869 | // this one doesn't match | |
5870 | break; | |
5871 | } | |
5872 | } | |
5873 | } | |
5874 | } | |
5875 | } | |
5876 | else // failed to get the menu text? | |
5877 | { | |
5878 | // it's not fatal, so don't show error, but still log it | |
5879 | wxLogLastError(wxT("GetMenuItemInfo")); | |
5880 | } | |
5881 | } | |
5882 | #endif | |
5883 | return wxNOT_FOUND; | |
5884 | } | |
5885 | ||
5886 | #endif // wxUSE_MENUS | |
5887 | ||
5888 | bool wxWindowMSW::HandleClipboardEvent(WXUINT nMsg) | |
5889 | { | |
5890 | const wxEventType type = nMsg == WM_CUT ? wxEVT_COMMAND_TEXT_CUT | |
5891 | : nMsg == WM_COPY ? wxEVT_COMMAND_TEXT_COPY | |
5892 | : /* nMsg == WM_PASTE */ wxEVT_COMMAND_TEXT_PASTE; | |
5893 | wxClipboardTextEvent evt(type, GetId()); | |
5894 | ||
5895 | evt.SetEventObject(this); | |
5896 | ||
5897 | return HandleWindowEvent(evt); | |
5898 | } | |
5899 | ||
5900 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
5901 | // joystick | |
5902 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
5903 | ||
5904 | bool wxWindowMSW::HandleJoystickEvent(WXUINT msg, int x, int y, WXUINT flags) | |
5905 | { | |
5906 | #ifdef JOY_BUTTON1 | |
5907 | int change = 0; | |
5908 | if ( flags & JOY_BUTTON1CHG ) | |
5909 | change = wxJOY_BUTTON1; | |
5910 | if ( flags & JOY_BUTTON2CHG ) | |
5911 | change = wxJOY_BUTTON2; | |
5912 | if ( flags & JOY_BUTTON3CHG ) | |
5913 | change = wxJOY_BUTTON3; | |
5914 | if ( flags & JOY_BUTTON4CHG ) | |
5915 | change = wxJOY_BUTTON4; | |
5916 | ||
5917 | int buttons = 0; | |
5918 | if ( flags & JOY_BUTTON1 ) | |
5919 | buttons |= wxJOY_BUTTON1; | |
5920 | if ( flags & JOY_BUTTON2 ) | |
5921 | buttons |= wxJOY_BUTTON2; | |
5922 | if ( flags & JOY_BUTTON3 ) | |
5923 | buttons |= wxJOY_BUTTON3; | |
5924 | if ( flags & JOY_BUTTON4 ) | |
5925 | buttons |= wxJOY_BUTTON4; | |
5926 | ||
5927 | // the event ids aren't consecutive so we can't use table based lookup | |
5928 | int joystick; | |
5929 | wxEventType eventType; | |
5930 | switch ( msg ) | |
5931 | { | |
5932 | case MM_JOY1MOVE: | |
5933 | joystick = 1; | |
5934 | eventType = wxEVT_JOY_MOVE; | |
5935 | break; | |
5936 | ||
5937 | case MM_JOY2MOVE: | |
5938 | joystick = 2; | |
5939 | eventType = wxEVT_JOY_MOVE; | |
5940 | break; | |
5941 | ||
5942 | case MM_JOY1ZMOVE: | |
5943 | joystick = 1; | |
5944 | eventType = wxEVT_JOY_ZMOVE; | |
5945 | break; | |
5946 | ||
5947 | case MM_JOY2ZMOVE: | |
5948 | joystick = 2; | |
5949 | eventType = wxEVT_JOY_ZMOVE; | |
5950 | break; | |
5951 | ||
5952 | case MM_JOY1BUTTONDOWN: | |
5953 | joystick = 1; | |
5954 | eventType = wxEVT_JOY_BUTTON_DOWN; | |
5955 | break; | |
5956 | ||
5957 | case MM_JOY2BUTTONDOWN: | |
5958 | joystick = 2; | |
5959 | eventType = wxEVT_JOY_BUTTON_DOWN; | |
5960 | break; | |
5961 | ||
5962 | case MM_JOY1BUTTONUP: | |
5963 | joystick = 1; | |
5964 | eventType = wxEVT_JOY_BUTTON_UP; | |
5965 | break; | |
5966 | ||
5967 | case MM_JOY2BUTTONUP: | |
5968 | joystick = 2; | |
5969 | eventType = wxEVT_JOY_BUTTON_UP; | |
5970 | break; | |
5971 | ||
5972 | default: | |
5973 | wxFAIL_MSG(wxT("no such joystick event")); | |
5974 | ||
5975 | return false; | |
5976 | } | |
5977 | ||
5978 | wxJoystickEvent event(eventType, buttons, joystick, change); | |
5979 | event.SetPosition(wxPoint(x, y)); | |
5980 | event.SetEventObject(this); | |
5981 | ||
5982 | return HandleWindowEvent(event); | |
5983 | #else | |
5984 | wxUnusedVar(msg); | |
5985 | wxUnusedVar(x); | |
5986 | wxUnusedVar(y); | |
5987 | wxUnusedVar(flags); | |
5988 | return false; | |
5989 | #endif | |
5990 | } | |
5991 | ||
5992 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
5993 | // scrolling | |
5994 | // --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
5995 | ||
5996 | bool wxWindowMSW::MSWOnScroll(int orientation, WXWORD wParam, | |
5997 | WXWORD pos, WXHWND control) | |
5998 | { | |
5999 | if ( control && control != m_hWnd ) // Prevent infinite recursion | |
6000 | { | |
6001 | wxWindow *child = wxFindWinFromHandle(control); | |
6002 | if ( child ) | |
6003 | return child->MSWOnScroll(orientation, wParam, pos, control); | |
6004 | } | |
6005 | ||
6006 | wxScrollWinEvent event; | |
6007 | event.SetPosition(pos); | |
6008 | event.SetOrientation(orientation); | |
6009 | event.SetEventObject(this); | |
6010 | ||
6011 | switch ( wParam ) | |
6012 | { | |
6013 | case SB_TOP: | |
6014 | event.SetEventType(wxEVT_SCROLLWIN_TOP); | |
6015 | break; | |
6016 | ||
6017 | case SB_BOTTOM: | |
6018 | event.SetEventType(wxEVT_SCROLLWIN_BOTTOM); | |
6019 | break; | |
6020 | ||
6021 | case SB_LINEUP: | |
6022 | event.SetEventType(wxEVT_SCROLLWIN_LINEUP); | |
6023 | break; | |
6024 | ||
6025 | case SB_LINEDOWN: | |
6026 | event.SetEventType(wxEVT_SCROLLWIN_LINEDOWN); | |
6027 | break; | |
6028 | ||
6029 | case SB_PAGEUP: | |
6030 | event.SetEventType(wxEVT_SCROLLWIN_PAGEUP); | |
6031 | break; | |
6032 | ||
6033 | case SB_PAGEDOWN: | |
6034 | event.SetEventType(wxEVT_SCROLLWIN_PAGEDOWN); | |
6035 | break; | |
6036 | ||
6037 | case SB_THUMBPOSITION: | |
6038 | case SB_THUMBTRACK: | |
6039 | // under Win32, the scrollbar range and position are 32 bit integers, | |
6040 | // but WM_[HV]SCROLL only carry the low 16 bits of them, so we must | |
6041 | // explicitly query the scrollbar for the correct position (this must | |
6042 | // be done only for these two SB_ events as they are the only one | |
6043 | // carrying the scrollbar position) | |
6044 | { | |
6045 | WinStruct<SCROLLINFO> scrollInfo; | |
6046 | scrollInfo.fMask = SIF_TRACKPOS; | |
6047 | ||
6048 | if ( !::GetScrollInfo(GetHwnd(), | |
6049 | WXOrientToSB(orientation), | |
6050 | &scrollInfo) ) | |
6051 | { | |
6052 | // Not necessarily an error, if there are no scrollbars yet. | |
6053 | // wxLogLastError(wxT("GetScrollInfo")); | |
6054 | } | |
6055 | ||
6056 | event.SetPosition(scrollInfo.nTrackPos); | |
6057 | } | |
6058 | ||
6059 | event.SetEventType( wParam == SB_THUMBPOSITION | |
6060 | ? wxEVT_SCROLLWIN_THUMBRELEASE | |
6061 | : wxEVT_SCROLLWIN_THUMBTRACK ); | |
6062 | break; | |
6063 | ||
6064 | default: | |
6065 | return false; | |
6066 | } | |
6067 | ||
6068 | return HandleWindowEvent(event); | |
6069 | } | |
6070 | ||
6071 | // ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
6072 | // custom message handlers | |
6073 | // ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
6074 | ||
6075 | /* static */ bool | |
6076 | wxWindowMSW::MSWRegisterMessageHandler(int msg, MSWMessageHandler handler) | |
6077 | { | |
6078 | wxCHECK_MSG( gs_messageHandlers.find(msg) == gs_messageHandlers.end(), | |
6079 | false, wxT("registering handler for the same message twice") ); | |
6080 | ||
6081 | gs_messageHandlers[msg] = handler; | |
6082 | return true; | |
6083 | } | |
6084 | ||
6085 | /* static */ void | |
6086 | wxWindowMSW::MSWUnregisterMessageHandler(int msg, MSWMessageHandler handler) | |
6087 | { | |
6088 | const MSWMessageHandlers::iterator i = gs_messageHandlers.find(msg); | |
6089 | wxCHECK_RET( i != gs_messageHandlers.end() && i->second == handler, | |
6090 | wxT("unregistering non-registered handler?") ); | |
6091 | ||
6092 | gs_messageHandlers.erase(i); | |
6093 | } | |
6094 | ||
6095 | // =========================================================================== | |
6096 | // global functions | |
6097 | // =========================================================================== | |
6098 | ||
6099 | void wxGetCharSize(WXHWND wnd, int *x, int *y, const wxFont& the_font) | |
6100 | { | |
6101 | TEXTMETRIC tm; | |
6102 | HDC dc = ::GetDC((HWND) wnd); | |
6103 | HFONT was = 0; | |
6104 | ||
6105 | // the_font.UseResource(); | |
6106 | // the_font.RealizeResource(); | |
6107 | HFONT fnt = (HFONT)the_font.GetResourceHandle(); // const_cast | |
6108 | if ( fnt ) | |
6109 | was = (HFONT) SelectObject(dc,fnt); | |
6110 | ||
6111 | GetTextMetrics(dc, &tm); | |
6112 | if ( fnt && was ) | |
6113 | { | |
6114 | SelectObject(dc,was); | |
6115 | } | |
6116 | ReleaseDC((HWND)wnd, dc); | |
6117 | ||
6118 | if ( x ) | |
6119 | *x = tm.tmAveCharWidth; | |
6120 | if ( y ) | |
6121 | *y = tm.tmHeight + tm.tmExternalLeading; | |
6122 | ||
6123 | // the_font.ReleaseResource(); | |
6124 | } | |
6125 | ||
6126 | // ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
6127 | // keyboard codes | |
6128 | // ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
6129 | ||
6130 | namespace wxMSWKeyboard | |
6131 | { | |
6132 | ||
6133 | namespace | |
6134 | { | |
6135 | ||
6136 | // use the "extended" bit of lParam to distinguish extended keys from normal | |
6137 | // keys as the same virtual key code is sent for both by Windows | |
6138 | inline | |
6139 | int ChooseNormalOrExtended(int lParam, int keyNormal, int keyExtended) | |
6140 | { | |
6141 | // except that if lParam is 0, it means we don't have real lParam from | |
6142 | // WM_KEYDOWN but are just translating just a VK constant (e.g. done from | |
6143 | // msw/treectrl.cpp when processing TVN_KEYDOWN) -- then assume this is a | |
6144 | // non-numpad (hence extended) key as this is a more common case | |
6145 | return !lParam || (HIWORD(lParam) & KF_EXTENDED) ? keyExtended : keyNormal; | |
6146 | } | |
6147 | ||
6148 | // this array contains the Windows virtual key codes which map one to one to | |
6149 | // WXK_xxx constants and is used in wxMSWKeyboard::VKToWX/WXToVK() below | |
6150 | // | |
6151 | // note that keys having a normal and numpad version (e.g. WXK_HOME and | |
6152 | // WXK_NUMPAD_HOME) are not included in this table as the mapping is not 1-to-1 | |
6153 | const struct wxKeyMapping | |
6154 | { | |
6155 | int vk; | |
6156 | wxKeyCode wxk; | |
6157 | } gs_specialKeys[] = | |
6158 | { | |
6159 | { VK_CANCEL, WXK_CANCEL }, | |
6160 | { VK_BACK, WXK_BACK }, | |
6161 | { VK_TAB, WXK_TAB }, | |
6162 | { VK_CLEAR, WXK_CLEAR }, | |
6163 | { VK_SHIFT, WXK_SHIFT }, | |
6164 | { VK_CONTROL, WXK_CONTROL }, | |
6165 | { VK_MENU , WXK_ALT }, | |
6166 | { VK_PAUSE, WXK_PAUSE }, | |
6167 | { VK_CAPITAL, WXK_CAPITAL }, | |
6168 | { VK_SPACE, WXK_SPACE }, | |
6169 | { VK_ESCAPE, WXK_ESCAPE }, | |
6170 | { VK_SELECT, WXK_SELECT }, | |
6171 | { VK_PRINT, WXK_PRINT }, | |
6172 | { VK_EXECUTE, WXK_EXECUTE }, | |
6173 | { VK_SNAPSHOT, WXK_SNAPSHOT }, | |
6174 | { VK_HELP, WXK_HELP }, | |
6175 | ||
6176 | { VK_NUMPAD0, WXK_NUMPAD0 }, | |
6177 | { VK_NUMPAD1, WXK_NUMPAD1 }, | |
6178 | { VK_NUMPAD2, WXK_NUMPAD2 }, | |
6179 | { VK_NUMPAD3, WXK_NUMPAD3 }, | |
6180 | { VK_NUMPAD4, WXK_NUMPAD4 }, | |
6181 | { VK_NUMPAD5, WXK_NUMPAD5 }, | |
6182 | { VK_NUMPAD6, WXK_NUMPAD6 }, | |
6183 | { VK_NUMPAD7, WXK_NUMPAD7 }, | |
6184 | { VK_NUMPAD8, WXK_NUMPAD8 }, | |
6185 | { VK_NUMPAD9, WXK_NUMPAD9 }, | |
6186 | { VK_MULTIPLY, WXK_NUMPAD_MULTIPLY }, | |
6187 | { VK_ADD, WXK_NUMPAD_ADD }, | |
6188 | { VK_SUBTRACT, WXK_NUMPAD_SUBTRACT }, | |
6189 | { VK_DECIMAL, WXK_NUMPAD_DECIMAL }, | |
6190 | { VK_DIVIDE, WXK_NUMPAD_DIVIDE }, | |
6191 | ||
6192 | { VK_F1, WXK_F1 }, | |
6193 | { VK_F2, WXK_F2 }, | |
6194 | { VK_F3, WXK_F3 }, | |
6195 | { VK_F4, WXK_F4 }, | |
6196 | { VK_F5, WXK_F5 }, | |
6197 | { VK_F6, WXK_F6 }, | |
6198 | { VK_F7, WXK_F7 }, | |
6199 | { VK_F8, WXK_F8 }, | |
6200 | { VK_F9, WXK_F9 }, | |
6201 | { VK_F10, WXK_F10 }, | |
6202 | { VK_F11, WXK_F11 }, | |
6203 | { VK_F12, WXK_F12 }, | |
6204 | { VK_F13, WXK_F13 }, | |
6205 | { VK_F14, WXK_F14 }, | |
6206 | { VK_F15, WXK_F15 }, | |
6207 | { VK_F16, WXK_F16 }, | |
6208 | { VK_F17, WXK_F17 }, | |
6209 | { VK_F18, WXK_F18 }, | |
6210 | { VK_F19, WXK_F19 }, | |
6211 | { VK_F20, WXK_F20 }, | |
6212 | { VK_F21, WXK_F21 }, | |
6213 | { VK_F22, WXK_F22 }, | |
6214 | { VK_F23, WXK_F23 }, | |
6215 | { VK_F24, WXK_F24 }, | |
6216 | ||
6217 | { VK_NUMLOCK, WXK_NUMLOCK }, | |
6218 | { VK_SCROLL, WXK_SCROLL }, | |
6219 | ||
6220 | #ifdef VK_APPS | |
6221 | { VK_LWIN, WXK_WINDOWS_LEFT }, | |
6222 | { VK_RWIN, WXK_WINDOWS_RIGHT }, | |
6223 | { VK_APPS, WXK_WINDOWS_MENU }, | |
6224 | #endif // VK_APPS defined | |
6225 | }; | |
6226 | ||
6227 | } // anonymous namespace | |
6228 | ||
6229 | int VKToWX(WXWORD vk, WXLPARAM lParam, wchar_t *uc) | |
6230 | { | |
6231 | int wxk; | |
6232 | ||
6233 | // check the table first | |
6234 | for ( size_t n = 0; n < WXSIZEOF(gs_specialKeys); n++ ) | |
6235 | { | |
6236 | if ( gs_specialKeys[n].vk == vk ) | |
6237 | { | |
6238 | wxk = gs_specialKeys[n].wxk; | |
6239 | if ( wxk < WXK_START ) | |
6240 | { | |
6241 | // Unicode code for this key is the same as its ASCII code. | |
6242 | if ( uc ) | |
6243 | *uc = wxk; | |
6244 | } | |
6245 | ||
6246 | return wxk; | |
6247 | } | |
6248 | } | |
6249 | ||
6250 | // keys requiring special handling | |
6251 | switch ( vk ) | |
6252 | { | |
6253 | case VK_OEM_1: | |
6254 | case VK_OEM_PLUS: | |
6255 | case VK_OEM_COMMA: | |
6256 | case VK_OEM_MINUS: | |
6257 | case VK_OEM_PERIOD: | |
6258 | case VK_OEM_2: | |
6259 | case VK_OEM_3: | |
6260 | case VK_OEM_4: | |
6261 | case VK_OEM_5: | |
6262 | case VK_OEM_6: | |
6263 | case VK_OEM_7: | |
6264 | // MapVirtualKey() returns 0 if it fails to convert the virtual | |
6265 | // key which nicely corresponds to our WXK_NONE. | |
6266 | wxk = ::MapVirtualKey(vk, MAPVK_VK_TO_CHAR); | |
6267 | ||
6268 | if ( HIWORD(wxk) & 0x8000 ) | |
6269 | { | |
6270 | // It's a dead key and we don't return anything at all for them | |
6271 | // as we simply don't have any way to indicate the difference | |
6272 | // between e.g. a normal "'" and "'" as a dead key -- and | |
6273 | // generating the same events for them just doesn't seem like a | |
6274 | // good idea. | |
6275 | wxk = WXK_NONE; | |
6276 | } | |
6277 | ||
6278 | // In any case return this as a Unicode character value. | |
6279 | if ( uc ) | |
6280 | *uc = wxk; | |
6281 | ||
6282 | // For compatibility with the old non-Unicode code we continue | |
6283 | // returning key codes for Latin-1 characters directly | |
6284 | // (normally it would really only make sense to do it for the | |
6285 | // ASCII characters, not Latin-1 ones). | |
6286 | if ( wxk > 255 ) | |
6287 | { | |
6288 | // But for anything beyond this we can only return the key | |
6289 | // value as a real Unicode character, not a wxKeyCode | |
6290 | // because this enum values clash with Unicode characters | |
6291 | // (e.g. WXK_LBUTTON also happens to be U+012C a.k.a. | |
6292 | // "LATIN CAPITAL LETTER I WITH BREVE"). | |
6293 | wxk = WXK_NONE; | |
6294 | } | |
6295 | break; | |
6296 | ||
6297 | // handle extended keys | |
6298 | case VK_PRIOR: | |
6299 | wxk = ChooseNormalOrExtended(lParam, WXK_NUMPAD_PAGEUP, WXK_PAGEUP); | |
6300 | break; | |
6301 | ||
6302 | case VK_NEXT: | |
6303 | wxk = ChooseNormalOrExtended(lParam, WXK_NUMPAD_PAGEDOWN, WXK_PAGEDOWN); | |
6304 | break; | |
6305 | ||
6306 | case VK_END: | |
6307 | wxk = ChooseNormalOrExtended(lParam, WXK_NUMPAD_END, WXK_END); | |
6308 | break; | |
6309 | ||
6310 | case VK_HOME: | |
6311 | wxk = ChooseNormalOrExtended(lParam, WXK_NUMPAD_HOME, WXK_HOME); | |
6312 | break; | |
6313 | ||
6314 | case VK_LEFT: | |
6315 | wxk = ChooseNormalOrExtended(lParam, WXK_NUMPAD_LEFT, WXK_LEFT); | |
6316 | break; | |
6317 | ||
6318 | case VK_UP: | |
6319 | wxk = ChooseNormalOrExtended(lParam, WXK_NUMPAD_UP, WXK_UP); | |
6320 | break; | |
6321 | ||
6322 | case VK_RIGHT: | |
6323 | wxk = ChooseNormalOrExtended(lParam, WXK_NUMPAD_RIGHT, WXK_RIGHT); | |
6324 | break; | |
6325 | ||
6326 | case VK_DOWN: | |
6327 | wxk = ChooseNormalOrExtended(lParam, WXK_NUMPAD_DOWN, WXK_DOWN); | |
6328 | break; | |
6329 | ||
6330 | case VK_INSERT: | |
6331 | wxk = ChooseNormalOrExtended(lParam, WXK_NUMPAD_INSERT, WXK_INSERT); | |
6332 | break; | |
6333 | ||
6334 | case VK_DELETE: | |
6335 | wxk = ChooseNormalOrExtended(lParam, WXK_NUMPAD_DELETE, WXK_DELETE); | |
6336 | break; | |
6337 | ||
6338 | case VK_RETURN: | |
6339 | // don't use ChooseNormalOrExtended() here as the keys are reversed | |
6340 | // here: numpad enter is the extended one | |
6341 | wxk = HIWORD(lParam) & KF_EXTENDED ? WXK_NUMPAD_ENTER : WXK_RETURN; | |
6342 | break; | |
6343 | ||
6344 | default: | |
6345 | if ( (vk >= '0' && vk <= '9') || (vk >= 'A' && vk <= 'Z') ) | |
6346 | { | |
6347 | // A simple alphanumeric key and the values of them coincide in | |
6348 | // Windows and wx for both ASCII and Unicode codes. | |
6349 | wxk = vk; | |
6350 | } | |
6351 | else // Something we simply don't know about at all. | |
6352 | { | |
6353 | wxk = WXK_NONE; | |
6354 | } | |
6355 | ||
6356 | if ( uc ) | |
6357 | *uc = vk; | |
6358 | } | |
6359 | ||
6360 | return wxk; | |
6361 | } | |
6362 | ||
6363 | WXWORD WXToVK(int wxk, bool *isExtended) | |
6364 | { | |
6365 | // check the table first | |
6366 | for ( size_t n = 0; n < WXSIZEOF(gs_specialKeys); n++ ) | |
6367 | { | |
6368 | if ( gs_specialKeys[n].wxk == wxk ) | |
6369 | { | |
6370 | // All extended keys (i.e. non-numpad versions of the keys that | |
6371 | // exist both in the numpad and outside of it) are dealt with | |
6372 | // below. | |
6373 | if ( isExtended ) | |
6374 | *isExtended = false; | |
6375 | ||
6376 | return gs_specialKeys[n].vk; | |
6377 | } | |
6378 | } | |
6379 | ||
6380 | // and then check for special keys not included in the table | |
6381 | bool extended = false; | |
6382 | WXWORD vk; | |
6383 | switch ( wxk ) | |
6384 | { | |
6385 | case WXK_PAGEUP: | |
6386 | extended = true; | |
6387 | case WXK_NUMPAD_PAGEUP: | |
6388 | vk = VK_PRIOR; | |
6389 | break; | |
6390 | ||
6391 | case WXK_PAGEDOWN: | |
6392 | extended = true; | |
6393 | case WXK_NUMPAD_PAGEDOWN: | |
6394 | vk = VK_NEXT; | |
6395 | break; | |
6396 | ||
6397 | case WXK_END: | |
6398 | extended = true; | |
6399 | case WXK_NUMPAD_END: | |
6400 | vk = VK_END; | |
6401 | break; | |
6402 | ||
6403 | case WXK_HOME: | |
6404 | extended = true; | |
6405 | case WXK_NUMPAD_HOME: | |
6406 | vk = VK_HOME; | |
6407 | break; | |
6408 | ||
6409 | case WXK_LEFT: | |
6410 | extended = true; | |
6411 | case WXK_NUMPAD_LEFT: | |
6412 | vk = VK_LEFT; | |
6413 | break; | |
6414 | ||
6415 | case WXK_UP: | |
6416 | extended = true; | |
6417 | case WXK_NUMPAD_UP: | |
6418 | vk = VK_UP; | |
6419 | break; | |
6420 | ||
6421 | case WXK_RIGHT: | |
6422 | extended = true; | |
6423 | case WXK_NUMPAD_RIGHT: | |
6424 | vk = VK_RIGHT; | |
6425 | break; | |
6426 | ||
6427 | case WXK_DOWN: | |
6428 | extended = true; | |
6429 | case WXK_NUMPAD_DOWN: | |
6430 | vk = VK_DOWN; | |
6431 | break; | |
6432 | ||
6433 | case WXK_INSERT: | |
6434 | extended = true; | |
6435 | case WXK_NUMPAD_INSERT: | |
6436 | vk = VK_INSERT; | |
6437 | break; | |
6438 | ||
6439 | case WXK_DELETE: | |
6440 | extended = true; | |
6441 | case WXK_NUMPAD_DELETE: | |
6442 | vk = VK_DELETE; | |
6443 | break; | |
6444 | ||
6445 | default: | |
6446 | // no VkKeyScan() under CE unfortunately, we need to test how does | |
6447 | // it handle OEM keys | |
6448 | #ifndef __WXWINCE__ | |
6449 | // check to see if its one of the OEM key codes. | |
6450 | BYTE vks = LOBYTE(VkKeyScan(wxk)); | |
6451 | if ( vks != 0xff ) | |
6452 | { | |
6453 | vk = vks; | |
6454 | } | |
6455 | else | |
6456 | #endif // !__WXWINCE__ | |
6457 | { | |
6458 | vk = (WXWORD)wxk; | |
6459 | } | |
6460 | } | |
6461 | ||
6462 | if ( isExtended ) | |
6463 | *isExtended = extended; | |
6464 | ||
6465 | return vk; | |
6466 | } | |
6467 | ||
6468 | } // namespace wxMSWKeyboard | |
6469 | ||
6470 | // small helper for wxGetKeyState() and wxGetMouseState() | |
6471 | static inline bool wxIsKeyDown(WXWORD vk) | |
6472 | { | |
6473 | // SM_SWAPBUTTON is not available under CE, so don't swap buttons there | |
6474 | #ifdef SM_SWAPBUTTON | |
6475 | if ( vk == VK_LBUTTON || vk == VK_RBUTTON ) | |
6476 | { | |
6477 | if ( ::GetSystemMetrics(SM_SWAPBUTTON) ) | |
6478 | { | |
6479 | if ( vk == VK_LBUTTON ) | |
6480 | vk = VK_RBUTTON; | |
6481 | else // vk == VK_RBUTTON | |
6482 | vk = VK_LBUTTON; | |
6483 | } | |
6484 | } | |
6485 | #endif // SM_SWAPBUTTON | |
6486 | ||
6487 | // the low order bit indicates whether the key was pressed since the last | |
6488 | // call and the high order one indicates whether it is down right now and | |
6489 | // we only want that one | |
6490 | return (GetAsyncKeyState(vk) & (1<<15)) != 0; | |
6491 | } | |
6492 | ||
6493 | bool wxGetKeyState(wxKeyCode key) | |
6494 | { | |
6495 | // although this does work under Windows, it is not supported under other | |
6496 | // platforms so don't allow it, you must use wxGetMouseState() instead | |
6497 | wxASSERT_MSG( key != VK_LBUTTON && | |
6498 | key != VK_RBUTTON && | |
6499 | key != VK_MBUTTON, | |
6500 | wxT("can't use wxGetKeyState() for mouse buttons") ); | |
6501 | ||
6502 | const WXWORD vk = wxMSWKeyboard::WXToVK(key); | |
6503 | ||
6504 | // if the requested key is a LED key, return true if the led is pressed | |
6505 | if ( key == WXK_NUMLOCK || key == WXK_CAPITAL || key == WXK_SCROLL ) | |
6506 | { | |
6507 | // low order bit means LED is highlighted and high order one means the | |
6508 | // key is down; for compatibility with the other ports return true if | |
6509 | // either one is set | |
6510 | return GetKeyState(vk) != 0; | |
6511 | ||
6512 | } | |
6513 | else // normal key | |
6514 | { | |
6515 | return wxIsKeyDown(vk); | |
6516 | } | |
6517 | } | |
6518 | ||
6519 | ||
6520 | wxMouseState wxGetMouseState() | |
6521 | { | |
6522 | wxMouseState ms; | |
6523 | POINT pt; | |
6524 | GetCursorPos( &pt ); | |
6525 | ||
6526 | ms.SetX(pt.x); | |
6527 | ms.SetY(pt.y); | |
6528 | ms.SetLeftDown(wxIsKeyDown(VK_LBUTTON)); | |
6529 | ms.SetMiddleDown(wxIsKeyDown(VK_MBUTTON)); | |
6530 | ms.SetRightDown(wxIsKeyDown(VK_RBUTTON)); | |
6531 | #ifdef wxHAS_XBUTTON | |
6532 | ms.SetAux1Down(wxIsKeyDown(VK_XBUTTON1)); | |
6533 | ms.SetAux2Down(wxIsKeyDown(VK_XBUTTON2)); | |
6534 | #endif // wxHAS_XBUTTON | |
6535 | ||
6536 | ms.SetControlDown(wxIsCtrlDown ()); | |
6537 | ms.SetShiftDown (wxIsShiftDown()); | |
6538 | ms.SetAltDown (wxIsAltDown ()); | |
6539 | // ms.SetMetaDown(); | |
6540 | ||
6541 | return ms; | |
6542 | } | |
6543 | ||
6544 | ||
6545 | wxWindow *wxGetActiveWindow() | |
6546 | { | |
6547 | HWND hWnd = GetActiveWindow(); | |
6548 | if ( hWnd != 0 ) | |
6549 | { | |
6550 | return wxFindWinFromHandle(hWnd); | |
6551 | } | |
6552 | return NULL; | |
6553 | } | |
6554 | ||
6555 | extern wxWindow *wxGetWindowFromHWND(WXHWND hWnd) | |
6556 | { | |
6557 | HWND hwnd = (HWND)hWnd; | |
6558 | ||
6559 | // For a radiobutton, we get the radiobox from GWL_USERDATA (which is set | |
6560 | // by code in msw/radiobox.cpp), for all the others we just search up the | |
6561 | // window hierarchy | |
6562 | wxWindow *win = NULL; | |
6563 | if ( hwnd ) | |
6564 | { | |
6565 | win = wxFindWinFromHandle(hwnd); | |
6566 | if ( !win ) | |
6567 | { | |
6568 | #if wxUSE_RADIOBOX && !defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__) | |
6569 | // native radiobuttons return DLGC_RADIOBUTTON here and for any | |
6570 | // wxWindow class which overrides WM_GETDLGCODE processing to | |
6571 | // do it as well, win would be already non NULL | |
6572 | if ( ::SendMessage(hwnd, WM_GETDLGCODE, 0, 0) & DLGC_RADIOBUTTON ) | |
6573 | { | |
6574 | win = wxRadioBox::GetFromRadioButtonHWND(hwnd); | |
6575 | } | |
6576 | //else: it's a wxRadioButton, not a radiobutton from wxRadioBox | |
6577 | #endif // wxUSE_RADIOBOX | |
6578 | ||
6579 | // spin control text buddy window should be mapped to spin ctrl | |
6580 | // itself so try it too | |
6581 | #if wxUSE_SPINCTRL && !defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__) | |
6582 | if ( !win ) | |
6583 | { | |
6584 | win = wxSpinCtrl::GetSpinForTextCtrl((WXHWND)hwnd); | |
6585 | } | |
6586 | #endif // wxUSE_SPINCTRL | |
6587 | } | |
6588 | } | |
6589 | ||
6590 | while ( hwnd && !win ) | |
6591 | { | |
6592 | // this is a really ugly hack needed to avoid mistakenly returning the | |
6593 | // parent frame wxWindow for the find/replace modeless dialog HWND - | |
6594 | // this, in turn, is needed to call IsDialogMessage() from | |
6595 | // wxApp::ProcessMessage() as for this we must return NULL from here | |
6596 | // | |
6597 | // FIXME: this is clearly not the best way to do it but I think we'll | |
6598 | // need to change HWND <-> wxWindow code more heavily than I can | |
6599 | // do it now to fix it | |
6600 | #ifndef __WXMICROWIN__ | |
6601 | if ( ::GetWindow(hwnd, GW_OWNER) ) | |
6602 | { | |
6603 | // it's a dialog box, don't go upwards | |
6604 | break; | |
6605 | } | |
6606 | #endif | |
6607 | ||
6608 | hwnd = ::GetParent(hwnd); | |
6609 | win = wxFindWinFromHandle(hwnd); | |
6610 | } | |
6611 | ||
6612 | return win; | |
6613 | } | |
6614 | ||
6615 | #if !defined(__WXMICROWIN__) && !defined(__WXWINCE__) | |
6616 | ||
6617 | // Windows keyboard hook. Allows interception of e.g. F1, ESCAPE | |
6618 | // in active frames and dialogs, regardless of where the focus is. | |
6619 | static HHOOK wxTheKeyboardHook = 0; | |
6620 | ||
6621 | int APIENTRY | |
6622 | wxKeyboardHook(int nCode, WORD wParam, DWORD lParam) | |
6623 | { | |
6624 | DWORD hiWord = HIWORD(lParam); | |
6625 | if ( nCode != HC_NOREMOVE && ((hiWord & KF_UP) == 0) ) | |
6626 | { | |
6627 | wchar_t uc; | |
6628 | int id = wxMSWKeyboard::VKToWX(wParam, lParam, &uc); | |
6629 | ||
6630 | // Don't intercept keyboard entry (notably Escape) if a modal window | |
6631 | // (not managed by wx, e.g. IME one) is currently opened as more often | |
6632 | // than not it needs all the keys for itself. | |
6633 | // | |
6634 | // Also don't catch it if a window currently captures the mouse as | |
6635 | // Escape is normally used to release the mouse capture and if you | |
6636 | // really need to catch all the keys in the window that has mouse | |
6637 | // capture it can be easily done in its own EVT_CHAR handler as it is | |
6638 | // certain to have focus while it has the capture. | |
6639 | if ( !gs_modalEntryWindowCount && !::GetCapture() ) | |
6640 | { | |
6641 | if ( id != WXK_NONE | |
6642 | #if wxUSE_UNICODE | |
6643 | || static_cast<int>(uc) != WXK_NONE | |
6644 | #endif // wxUSE_UNICODE | |
6645 | ) | |
6646 | { | |
6647 | const wxWindow * const win = wxGetActiveWindow(); | |
6648 | ||
6649 | wxKeyEvent event(wxEVT_CHAR_HOOK); | |
6650 | MSWInitAnyKeyEvent(event, wParam, lParam, win); | |
6651 | ||
6652 | event.m_keyCode = id; | |
6653 | #if wxUSE_UNICODE | |
6654 | event.m_uniChar = uc; | |
6655 | #endif // wxUSE_UNICODE | |
6656 | ||
6657 | wxEvtHandler * const handler = win ? win->GetEventHandler() | |
6658 | : wxTheApp; | |
6659 | ||
6660 | if ( handler && handler->ProcessEvent(event) ) | |
6661 | { | |
6662 | // processed | |
6663 | return 1; | |
6664 | } | |
6665 | } | |
6666 | } | |
6667 | } | |
6668 | ||
6669 | return (int)CallNextHookEx(wxTheKeyboardHook, nCode, wParam, lParam); | |
6670 | } | |
6671 | ||
6672 | void wxSetKeyboardHook(bool doIt) | |
6673 | { | |
6674 | if ( doIt ) | |
6675 | { | |
6676 | wxTheKeyboardHook = ::SetWindowsHookEx | |
6677 | ( | |
6678 | WH_KEYBOARD, | |
6679 | (HOOKPROC)wxKeyboardHook, | |
6680 | NULL, // must be NULL for process hook | |
6681 | ::GetCurrentThreadId() | |
6682 | ); | |
6683 | if ( !wxTheKeyboardHook ) | |
6684 | { | |
6685 | wxLogLastError(wxT("SetWindowsHookEx(wxKeyboardHook)")); | |
6686 | } | |
6687 | } | |
6688 | else // uninstall | |
6689 | { | |
6690 | if ( wxTheKeyboardHook ) | |
6691 | ::UnhookWindowsHookEx(wxTheKeyboardHook); | |
6692 | } | |
6693 | } | |
6694 | ||
6695 | #endif // !__WXMICROWIN__ | |
6696 | ||
6697 | #if wxDEBUG_LEVEL >= 2 | |
6698 | const wxChar *wxGetMessageName(int message) | |
6699 | { | |
6700 | switch ( message ) | |
6701 | { | |
6702 | case 0x0000: return wxT("WM_NULL"); | |
6703 | case 0x0001: return wxT("WM_CREATE"); | |
6704 | case 0x0002: return wxT("WM_DESTROY"); | |
6705 | case 0x0003: return wxT("WM_MOVE"); | |
6706 | case 0x0005: return wxT("WM_SIZE"); | |
6707 | case 0x0006: return wxT("WM_ACTIVATE"); | |
6708 | case 0x0007: return wxT("WM_SETFOCUS"); | |
6709 | case 0x0008: return wxT("WM_KILLFOCUS"); | |
6710 | case 0x000A: return wxT("WM_ENABLE"); | |
6711 | case 0x000B: return wxT("WM_SETREDRAW"); | |
6712 | case 0x000C: return wxT("WM_SETTEXT"); | |
6713 | case 0x000D: return wxT("WM_GETTEXT"); | |
6714 | case 0x000E: return wxT("WM_GETTEXTLENGTH"); | |
6715 | case 0x000F: return wxT("WM_PAINT"); | |
6716 | case 0x0010: return wxT("WM_CLOSE"); | |
6717 | case 0x0011: return wxT("WM_QUERYENDSESSION"); | |
6718 | case 0x0012: return wxT("WM_QUIT"); | |
6719 | case 0x0013: return wxT("WM_QUERYOPEN"); | |
6720 | case 0x0014: return wxT("WM_ERASEBKGND"); | |
6721 | case 0x0015: return wxT("WM_SYSCOLORCHANGE"); | |
6722 | case 0x0016: return wxT("WM_ENDSESSION"); | |
6723 | case 0x0017: return wxT("WM_SYSTEMERROR"); | |
6724 | case 0x0018: return wxT("WM_SHOWWINDOW"); | |
6725 | case 0x0019: return wxT("WM_CTLCOLOR"); | |
6726 | case 0x001A: return wxT("WM_WININICHANGE"); | |
6727 | case 0x001B: return wxT("WM_DEVMODECHANGE"); | |
6728 | case 0x001C: return wxT("WM_ACTIVATEAPP"); | |
6729 | case 0x001D: return wxT("WM_FONTCHANGE"); | |
6730 | case 0x001E: return wxT("WM_TIMECHANGE"); | |
6731 | case 0x001F: return wxT("WM_CANCELMODE"); | |
6732 | case 0x0020: return wxT("WM_SETCURSOR"); | |
6733 | case 0x0021: return wxT("WM_MOUSEACTIVATE"); | |
6734 | case 0x0022: return wxT("WM_CHILDACTIVATE"); | |
6735 | case 0x0023: return wxT("WM_QUEUESYNC"); | |
6736 | case 0x0024: return wxT("WM_GETMINMAXINFO"); | |
6737 | case 0x0026: return wxT("WM_PAINTICON"); | |
6738 | case 0x0027: return wxT("WM_ICONERASEBKGND"); | |
6739 | case 0x0028: return wxT("WM_NEXTDLGCTL"); | |
6740 | case 0x002A: return wxT("WM_SPOOLERSTATUS"); | |
6741 | case 0x002B: return wxT("WM_DRAWITEM"); | |
6742 | case 0x002C: return wxT("WM_MEASUREITEM"); | |
6743 | case 0x002D: return wxT("WM_DELETEITEM"); | |
6744 | case 0x002E: return wxT("WM_VKEYTOITEM"); | |
6745 | case 0x002F: return wxT("WM_CHARTOITEM"); | |
6746 | case 0x0030: return wxT("WM_SETFONT"); | |
6747 | case 0x0031: return wxT("WM_GETFONT"); | |
6748 | case 0x0037: return wxT("WM_QUERYDRAGICON"); | |
6749 | case 0x0039: return wxT("WM_COMPAREITEM"); | |
6750 | case 0x0041: return wxT("WM_COMPACTING"); | |
6751 | case 0x0044: return wxT("WM_COMMNOTIFY"); | |
6752 | case 0x0046: return wxT("WM_WINDOWPOSCHANGING"); | |
6753 | case 0x0047: return wxT("WM_WINDOWPOSCHANGED"); | |
6754 | case 0x0048: return wxT("WM_POWER"); | |
6755 | ||
6756 | case 0x004A: return wxT("WM_COPYDATA"); | |
6757 | case 0x004B: return wxT("WM_CANCELJOURNAL"); | |
6758 | case 0x004E: return wxT("WM_NOTIFY"); | |
6759 | case 0x0050: return wxT("WM_INPUTLANGCHANGEREQUEST"); | |
6760 | case 0x0051: return wxT("WM_INPUTLANGCHANGE"); | |
6761 | case 0x0052: return wxT("WM_TCARD"); | |
6762 | case 0x0053: return wxT("WM_HELP"); | |
6763 | case 0x0054: return wxT("WM_USERCHANGED"); | |
6764 | case 0x0055: return wxT("WM_NOTIFYFORMAT"); | |
6765 | case 0x007B: return wxT("WM_CONTEXTMENU"); | |
6766 | case 0x007C: return wxT("WM_STYLECHANGING"); | |
6767 | case 0x007D: return wxT("WM_STYLECHANGED"); | |
6768 | case 0x007E: return wxT("WM_DISPLAYCHANGE"); | |
6769 | case 0x007F: return wxT("WM_GETICON"); | |
6770 | case 0x0080: return wxT("WM_SETICON"); | |
6771 | ||
6772 | case 0x0081: return wxT("WM_NCCREATE"); | |
6773 | case 0x0082: return wxT("WM_NCDESTROY"); | |
6774 | case 0x0083: return wxT("WM_NCCALCSIZE"); | |
6775 | case 0x0084: return wxT("WM_NCHITTEST"); | |
6776 | case 0x0085: return wxT("WM_NCPAINT"); | |
6777 | case 0x0086: return wxT("WM_NCACTIVATE"); | |
6778 | case 0x0087: return wxT("WM_GETDLGCODE"); | |
6779 | case 0x00A0: return wxT("WM_NCMOUSEMOVE"); | |
6780 | case 0x00A1: return wxT("WM_NCLBUTTONDOWN"); | |
6781 | case 0x00A2: return wxT("WM_NCLBUTTONUP"); | |
6782 | case 0x00A3: return wxT("WM_NCLBUTTONDBLCLK"); | |
6783 | case 0x00A4: return wxT("WM_NCRBUTTONDOWN"); | |
6784 | case 0x00A5: return wxT("WM_NCRBUTTONUP"); | |
6785 | case 0x00A6: return wxT("WM_NCRBUTTONDBLCLK"); | |
6786 | case 0x00A7: return wxT("WM_NCMBUTTONDOWN"); | |
6787 | case 0x00A8: return wxT("WM_NCMBUTTONUP"); | |
6788 | case 0x00A9: return wxT("WM_NCMBUTTONDBLCLK"); | |
6789 | ||
6790 | case 0x00B0: return wxT("EM_GETSEL"); | |
6791 | case 0x00B1: return wxT("EM_SETSEL"); | |
6792 | case 0x00B2: return wxT("EM_GETRECT"); | |
6793 | case 0x00B3: return wxT("EM_SETRECT"); | |
6794 | case 0x00B4: return wxT("EM_SETRECTNP"); | |
6795 | case 0x00B5: return wxT("EM_SCROLL"); | |
6796 | case 0x00B6: return wxT("EM_LINESCROLL"); | |
6797 | case 0x00B7: return wxT("EM_SCROLLCARET"); | |
6798 | case 0x00B8: return wxT("EM_GETMODIFY"); | |
6799 | case 0x00B9: return wxT("EM_SETMODIFY"); | |
6800 | case 0x00BA: return wxT("EM_GETLINECOUNT"); | |
6801 | case 0x00BB: return wxT("EM_LINEINDEX"); | |
6802 | case 0x00BC: return wxT("EM_SETHANDLE"); | |
6803 | case 0x00BD: return wxT("EM_GETHANDLE"); | |
6804 | case 0x00BE: return wxT("EM_GETTHUMB"); | |
6805 | case 0x00C1: return wxT("EM_LINELENGTH"); | |
6806 | case 0x00C2: return wxT("EM_REPLACESEL"); | |
6807 | case 0x00C4: return wxT("EM_GETLINE"); | |
6808 | case 0x00C5: return wxT("EM_LIMITTEXT/EM_SETLIMITTEXT"); /* ;win40 Name change */ | |
6809 | case 0x00C6: return wxT("EM_CANUNDO"); | |
6810 | case 0x00C7: return wxT("EM_UNDO"); | |
6811 | case 0x00C8: return wxT("EM_FMTLINES"); | |
6812 | case 0x00C9: return wxT("EM_LINEFROMCHAR"); | |
6813 | case 0x00CB: return wxT("EM_SETTABSTOPS"); | |
6814 | case 0x00CC: return wxT("EM_SETPASSWORDCHAR"); | |
6815 | case 0x00CD: return wxT("EM_EMPTYUNDOBUFFER"); | |
6816 | case 0x00CE: return wxT("EM_GETFIRSTVISIBLELINE"); | |
6817 | case 0x00CF: return wxT("EM_SETREADONLY"); | |
6818 | case 0x00D0: return wxT("EM_SETWORDBREAKPROC"); | |
6819 | case 0x00D1: return wxT("EM_GETWORDBREAKPROC"); | |
6820 | case 0x00D2: return wxT("EM_GETPASSWORDCHAR"); | |
6821 | case 0x00D3: return wxT("EM_SETMARGINS"); | |
6822 | case 0x00D4: return wxT("EM_GETMARGINS"); | |
6823 | case 0x00D5: return wxT("EM_GETLIMITTEXT"); | |
6824 | case 0x00D6: return wxT("EM_POSFROMCHAR"); | |
6825 | case 0x00D7: return wxT("EM_CHARFROMPOS"); | |
6826 | case 0x00D8: return wxT("EM_SETIMESTATUS"); | |
6827 | case 0x00D9: return wxT("EM_GETIMESTATUS"); | |
6828 | ||
6829 | case 0x0100: return wxT("WM_KEYDOWN"); | |
6830 | case 0x0101: return wxT("WM_KEYUP"); | |
6831 | case 0x0102: return wxT("WM_CHAR"); | |
6832 | case 0x0103: return wxT("WM_DEADCHAR"); | |
6833 | case 0x0104: return wxT("WM_SYSKEYDOWN"); | |
6834 | case 0x0105: return wxT("WM_SYSKEYUP"); | |
6835 | case 0x0106: return wxT("WM_SYSCHAR"); | |
6836 | case 0x0107: return wxT("WM_SYSDEADCHAR"); | |
6837 | case 0x0108: return wxT("WM_KEYLAST"); | |
6838 | ||
6839 | case 0x010D: return wxT("WM_IME_STARTCOMPOSITION"); | |
6840 | case 0x010E: return wxT("WM_IME_ENDCOMPOSITION"); | |
6841 | case 0x010F: return wxT("WM_IME_COMPOSITION"); | |
6842 | ||
6843 | case 0x0110: return wxT("WM_INITDIALOG"); | |
6844 | case 0x0111: return wxT("WM_COMMAND"); | |
6845 | case 0x0112: return wxT("WM_SYSCOMMAND"); | |
6846 | case 0x0113: return wxT("WM_TIMER"); | |
6847 | case 0x0114: return wxT("WM_HSCROLL"); | |
6848 | case 0x0115: return wxT("WM_VSCROLL"); | |
6849 | case 0x0116: return wxT("WM_INITMENU"); | |
6850 | case 0x0117: return wxT("WM_INITMENUPOPUP"); | |
6851 | case 0x011F: return wxT("WM_MENUSELECT"); | |
6852 | case 0x0120: return wxT("WM_MENUCHAR"); | |
6853 | case 0x0121: return wxT("WM_ENTERIDLE"); | |
6854 | ||
6855 | case 0x0127: return wxT("WM_CHANGEUISTATE"); | |
6856 | case 0x0128: return wxT("WM_UPDATEUISTATE"); | |
6857 | case 0x0129: return wxT("WM_QUERYUISTATE"); | |
6858 | ||
6859 | case 0x0132: return wxT("WM_CTLCOLORMSGBOX"); | |
6860 | case 0x0133: return wxT("WM_CTLCOLOREDIT"); | |
6861 | case 0x0134: return wxT("WM_CTLCOLORLISTBOX"); | |
6862 | case 0x0135: return wxT("WM_CTLCOLORBTN"); | |
6863 | case 0x0136: return wxT("WM_CTLCOLORDLG"); | |
6864 | case 0x0137: return wxT("WM_CTLCOLORSCROLLBAR"); | |
6865 | case 0x0138: return wxT("WM_CTLCOLORSTATIC"); | |
6866 | case 0x01E1: return wxT("MN_GETHMENU"); | |
6867 | ||
6868 | case 0x0200: return wxT("WM_MOUSEMOVE"); | |
6869 | case 0x0201: return wxT("WM_LBUTTONDOWN"); | |
6870 | case 0x0202: return wxT("WM_LBUTTONUP"); | |
6871 | case 0x0203: return wxT("WM_LBUTTONDBLCLK"); | |
6872 | case 0x0204: return wxT("WM_RBUTTONDOWN"); | |
6873 | case 0x0205: return wxT("WM_RBUTTONUP"); | |
6874 | case 0x0206: return wxT("WM_RBUTTONDBLCLK"); | |
6875 | case 0x0207: return wxT("WM_MBUTTONDOWN"); | |
6876 | case 0x0208: return wxT("WM_MBUTTONUP"); | |
6877 | case 0x0209: return wxT("WM_MBUTTONDBLCLK"); | |
6878 | case 0x020A: return wxT("WM_MOUSEWHEEL"); | |
6879 | case 0x020B: return wxT("WM_XBUTTONDOWN"); | |
6880 | case 0x020C: return wxT("WM_XBUTTONUP"); | |
6881 | case 0x020D: return wxT("WM_XBUTTONDBLCLK"); | |
6882 | case 0x0210: return wxT("WM_PARENTNOTIFY"); | |
6883 | case 0x0211: return wxT("WM_ENTERMENULOOP"); | |
6884 | case 0x0212: return wxT("WM_EXITMENULOOP"); | |
6885 | ||
6886 | case 0x0213: return wxT("WM_NEXTMENU"); | |
6887 | case 0x0214: return wxT("WM_SIZING"); | |
6888 | case 0x0215: return wxT("WM_CAPTURECHANGED"); | |
6889 | case 0x0216: return wxT("WM_MOVING"); | |
6890 | case 0x0218: return wxT("WM_POWERBROADCAST"); | |
6891 | case 0x0219: return wxT("WM_DEVICECHANGE"); | |
6892 | ||
6893 | case 0x0220: return wxT("WM_MDICREATE"); | |
6894 | case 0x0221: return wxT("WM_MDIDESTROY"); | |
6895 | case 0x0222: return wxT("WM_MDIACTIVATE"); | |
6896 | case 0x0223: return wxT("WM_MDIRESTORE"); | |
6897 | case 0x0224: return wxT("WM_MDINEXT"); | |
6898 | case 0x0225: return wxT("WM_MDIMAXIMIZE"); | |
6899 | case 0x0226: return wxT("WM_MDITILE"); | |
6900 | case 0x0227: return wxT("WM_MDICASCADE"); | |
6901 | case 0x0228: return wxT("WM_MDIICONARRANGE"); | |
6902 | case 0x0229: return wxT("WM_MDIGETACTIVE"); | |
6903 | case 0x0230: return wxT("WM_MDISETMENU"); | |
6904 | case 0x0233: return wxT("WM_DROPFILES"); | |
6905 | ||
6906 | case 0x0281: return wxT("WM_IME_SETCONTEXT"); | |
6907 | case 0x0282: return wxT("WM_IME_NOTIFY"); | |
6908 | case 0x0283: return wxT("WM_IME_CONTROL"); | |
6909 | case 0x0284: return wxT("WM_IME_COMPOSITIONFULL"); | |
6910 | case 0x0285: return wxT("WM_IME_SELECT"); | |
6911 | case 0x0286: return wxT("WM_IME_CHAR"); | |
6912 | case 0x0290: return wxT("WM_IME_KEYDOWN"); | |
6913 | case 0x0291: return wxT("WM_IME_KEYUP"); | |
6914 | ||
6915 | case 0x02A0: return wxT("WM_NCMOUSEHOVER"); | |
6916 | case 0x02A1: return wxT("WM_MOUSEHOVER"); | |
6917 | case 0x02A2: return wxT("WM_NCMOUSELEAVE"); | |
6918 | case 0x02A3: return wxT("WM_MOUSELEAVE"); | |
6919 | ||
6920 | case 0x0300: return wxT("WM_CUT"); | |
6921 | case 0x0301: return wxT("WM_COPY"); | |
6922 | case 0x0302: return wxT("WM_PASTE"); | |
6923 | case 0x0303: return wxT("WM_CLEAR"); | |
6924 | case 0x0304: return wxT("WM_UNDO"); | |
6925 | case 0x0305: return wxT("WM_RENDERFORMAT"); | |
6926 | case 0x0306: return wxT("WM_RENDERALLFORMATS"); | |
6927 | case 0x0307: return wxT("WM_DESTROYCLIPBOARD"); | |
6928 | case 0x0308: return wxT("WM_DRAWCLIPBOARD"); | |
6929 | case 0x0309: return wxT("WM_PAINTCLIPBOARD"); | |
6930 | case 0x030A: return wxT("WM_VSCROLLCLIPBOARD"); | |
6931 | case 0x030B: return wxT("WM_SIZECLIPBOARD"); | |
6932 | case 0x030C: return wxT("WM_ASKCBFORMATNAME"); | |
6933 | case 0x030D: return wxT("WM_CHANGECBCHAIN"); | |
6934 | case 0x030E: return wxT("WM_HSCROLLCLIPBOARD"); | |
6935 | case 0x030F: return wxT("WM_QUERYNEWPALETTE"); | |
6936 | case 0x0310: return wxT("WM_PALETTEISCHANGING"); | |
6937 | case 0x0311: return wxT("WM_PALETTECHANGED"); | |
6938 | case 0x0312: return wxT("WM_HOTKEY"); | |
6939 | ||
6940 | case 0x0317: return wxT("WM_PRINT"); | |
6941 | case 0x0318: return wxT("WM_PRINTCLIENT"); | |
6942 | ||
6943 | // common controls messages - although they're not strictly speaking | |
6944 | // standard, it's nice to decode them nevertheless | |
6945 | ||
6946 | // listview | |
6947 | case 0x1000 + 0: return wxT("LVM_GETBKCOLOR"); | |
6948 | case 0x1000 + 1: return wxT("LVM_SETBKCOLOR"); | |
6949 | case 0x1000 + 2: return wxT("LVM_GETIMAGELIST"); | |
6950 | case 0x1000 + 3: return wxT("LVM_SETIMAGELIST"); | |
6951 | case 0x1000 + 4: return wxT("LVM_GETITEMCOUNT"); | |
6952 | case 0x1000 + 5: return wxT("LVM_GETITEMA"); | |
6953 | case 0x1000 + 75: return wxT("LVM_GETITEMW"); | |
6954 | case 0x1000 + 6: return wxT("LVM_SETITEMA"); | |
6955 | case 0x1000 + 76: return wxT("LVM_SETITEMW"); | |
6956 | case 0x1000 + 7: return wxT("LVM_INSERTITEMA"); | |
6957 | case 0x1000 + 77: return wxT("LVM_INSERTITEMW"); | |
6958 | case 0x1000 + 8: return wxT("LVM_DELETEITEM"); | |
6959 | case 0x1000 + 9: return wxT("LVM_DELETEALLITEMS"); | |
6960 | case 0x1000 + 10: return wxT("LVM_GETCALLBACKMASK"); | |
6961 | case 0x1000 + 11: return wxT("LVM_SETCALLBACKMASK"); | |
6962 | case 0x1000 + 12: return wxT("LVM_GETNEXTITEM"); | |
6963 | case 0x1000 + 13: return wxT("LVM_FINDITEMA"); | |
6964 | case 0x1000 + 83: return wxT("LVM_FINDITEMW"); | |
6965 | case 0x1000 + 14: return wxT("LVM_GETITEMRECT"); | |
6966 | case 0x1000 + 15: return wxT("LVM_SETITEMPOSITION"); | |
6967 | case 0x1000 + 16: return wxT("LVM_GETITEMPOSITION"); | |
6968 | case 0x1000 + 17: return wxT("LVM_GETSTRINGWIDTHA"); | |
6969 | case 0x1000 + 87: return wxT("LVM_GETSTRINGWIDTHW"); | |
6970 | case 0x1000 + 18: return wxT("LVM_HITTEST"); | |
6971 | case 0x1000 + 19: return wxT("LVM_ENSUREVISIBLE"); | |
6972 | case 0x1000 + 20: return wxT("LVM_SCROLL"); | |
6973 | case 0x1000 + 21: return wxT("LVM_REDRAWITEMS"); | |
6974 | case 0x1000 + 22: return wxT("LVM_ARRANGE"); | |
6975 | case 0x1000 + 23: return wxT("LVM_EDITLABELA"); | |
6976 | case 0x1000 + 118: return wxT("LVM_EDITLABELW"); | |
6977 | case 0x1000 + 24: return wxT("LVM_GETEDITCONTROL"); | |
6978 | case 0x1000 + 25: return wxT("LVM_GETCOLUMNA"); | |
6979 | case 0x1000 + 95: return wxT("LVM_GETCOLUMNW"); | |
6980 | case 0x1000 + 26: return wxT("LVM_SETCOLUMNA"); | |
6981 | case 0x1000 + 96: return wxT("LVM_SETCOLUMNW"); | |
6982 | case 0x1000 + 27: return wxT("LVM_INSERTCOLUMNA"); | |
6983 | case 0x1000 + 97: return wxT("LVM_INSERTCOLUMNW"); | |
6984 | case 0x1000 + 28: return wxT("LVM_DELETECOLUMN"); | |
6985 | case 0x1000 + 29: return wxT("LVM_GETCOLUMNWIDTH"); | |
6986 | case 0x1000 + 30: return wxT("LVM_SETCOLUMNWIDTH"); | |
6987 | case 0x1000 + 31: return wxT("LVM_GETHEADER"); | |
6988 | case 0x1000 + 33: return wxT("LVM_CREATEDRAGIMAGE"); | |
6989 | case 0x1000 + 34: return wxT("LVM_GETVIEWRECT"); | |
6990 | case 0x1000 + 35: return wxT("LVM_GETTEXTCOLOR"); | |
6991 | case 0x1000 + 36: return wxT("LVM_SETTEXTCOLOR"); | |
6992 | case 0x1000 + 37: return wxT("LVM_GETTEXTBKCOLOR"); | |
6993 | case 0x1000 + 38: return wxT("LVM_SETTEXTBKCOLOR"); | |
6994 | case 0x1000 + 39: return wxT("LVM_GETTOPINDEX"); | |
6995 | case 0x1000 + 40: return wxT("LVM_GETCOUNTPERPAGE"); | |
6996 | case 0x1000 + 41: return wxT("LVM_GETORIGIN"); | |
6997 | case 0x1000 + 42: return wxT("LVM_UPDATE"); | |
6998 | case 0x1000 + 43: return wxT("LVM_SETITEMSTATE"); | |
6999 | case 0x1000 + 44: return wxT("LVM_GETITEMSTATE"); | |
7000 | case 0x1000 + 45: return wxT("LVM_GETITEMTEXTA"); | |
7001 | case 0x1000 + 115: return wxT("LVM_GETITEMTEXTW"); | |
7002 | case 0x1000 + 46: return wxT("LVM_SETITEMTEXTA"); | |
7003 | case 0x1000 + 116: return wxT("LVM_SETITEMTEXTW"); | |
7004 | case 0x1000 + 47: return wxT("LVM_SETITEMCOUNT"); | |
7005 | case 0x1000 + 48: return wxT("LVM_SORTITEMS"); | |
7006 | case 0x1000 + 49: return wxT("LVM_SETITEMPOSITION32"); | |
7007 | case 0x1000 + 50: return wxT("LVM_GETSELECTEDCOUNT"); | |
7008 | case 0x1000 + 51: return wxT("LVM_GETITEMSPACING"); | |
7009 | case 0x1000 + 52: return wxT("LVM_GETISEARCHSTRINGA"); | |
7010 | case 0x1000 + 117: return wxT("LVM_GETISEARCHSTRINGW"); | |
7011 | case 0x1000 + 53: return wxT("LVM_SETICONSPACING"); | |
7012 | case 0x1000 + 54: return wxT("LVM_SETEXTENDEDLISTVIEWSTYLE"); | |
7013 | case 0x1000 + 55: return wxT("LVM_GETEXTENDEDLISTVIEWSTYLE"); | |
7014 | case 0x1000 + 56: return wxT("LVM_GETSUBITEMRECT"); | |
7015 | case 0x1000 + 57: return wxT("LVM_SUBITEMHITTEST"); | |
7016 | case 0x1000 + 58: return wxT("LVM_SETCOLUMNORDERARRAY"); | |
7017 | case 0x1000 + 59: return wxT("LVM_GETCOLUMNORDERARRAY"); | |
7018 | case 0x1000 + 60: return wxT("LVM_SETHOTITEM"); | |
7019 | case 0x1000 + 61: return wxT("LVM_GETHOTITEM"); | |
7020 | case 0x1000 + 62: return wxT("LVM_SETHOTCURSOR"); | |
7021 | case 0x1000 + 63: return wxT("LVM_GETHOTCURSOR"); | |
7022 | case 0x1000 + 64: return wxT("LVM_APPROXIMATEVIEWRECT"); | |
7023 | case 0x1000 + 65: return wxT("LVM_SETWORKAREA"); | |
7024 | ||
7025 | // tree view | |
7026 | case 0x1100 + 0: return wxT("TVM_INSERTITEMA"); | |
7027 | case 0x1100 + 50: return wxT("TVM_INSERTITEMW"); | |
7028 | case 0x1100 + 1: return wxT("TVM_DELETEITEM"); | |
7029 | case 0x1100 + 2: return wxT("TVM_EXPAND"); | |
7030 | case 0x1100 + 4: return wxT("TVM_GETITEMRECT"); | |
7031 | case 0x1100 + 5: return wxT("TVM_GETCOUNT"); | |
7032 | case 0x1100 + 6: return wxT("TVM_GETINDENT"); | |
7033 | case 0x1100 + 7: return wxT("TVM_SETINDENT"); | |
7034 | case 0x1100 + 8: return wxT("TVM_GETIMAGELIST"); | |
7035 | case 0x1100 + 9: return wxT("TVM_SETIMAGELIST"); | |
7036 | case 0x1100 + 10: return wxT("TVM_GETNEXTITEM"); | |
7037 | case 0x1100 + 11: return wxT("TVM_SELECTITEM"); | |
7038 | case 0x1100 + 12: return wxT("TVM_GETITEMA"); | |
7039 | case 0x1100 + 62: return wxT("TVM_GETITEMW"); | |
7040 | case 0x1100 + 13: return wxT("TVM_SETITEMA"); | |
7041 | case 0x1100 + 63: return wxT("TVM_SETITEMW"); | |
7042 | case 0x1100 + 14: return wxT("TVM_EDITLABELA"); | |
7043 | case 0x1100 + 65: return wxT("TVM_EDITLABELW"); | |
7044 | case 0x1100 + 15: return wxT("TVM_GETEDITCONTROL"); | |
7045 | case 0x1100 + 16: return wxT("TVM_GETVISIBLECOUNT"); | |
7046 | case 0x1100 + 17: return wxT("TVM_HITTEST"); | |
7047 | case 0x1100 + 18: return wxT("TVM_CREATEDRAGIMAGE"); | |
7048 | case 0x1100 + 19: return wxT("TVM_SORTCHILDREN"); | |
7049 | case 0x1100 + 20: return wxT("TVM_ENSUREVISIBLE"); | |
7050 | case 0x1100 + 21: return wxT("TVM_SORTCHILDRENCB"); | |
7051 | case 0x1100 + 22: return wxT("TVM_ENDEDITLABELNOW"); | |
7052 | case 0x1100 + 23: return wxT("TVM_GETISEARCHSTRINGA"); | |
7053 | case 0x1100 + 64: return wxT("TVM_GETISEARCHSTRINGW"); | |
7054 | case 0x1100 + 24: return wxT("TVM_SETTOOLTIPS"); | |
7055 | case 0x1100 + 25: return wxT("TVM_GETTOOLTIPS"); | |
7056 | ||
7057 | // header | |
7058 | case 0x1200 + 0: return wxT("HDM_GETITEMCOUNT"); | |
7059 | case 0x1200 + 1: return wxT("HDM_INSERTITEMA"); | |
7060 | case 0x1200 + 10: return wxT("HDM_INSERTITEMW"); | |
7061 | case 0x1200 + 2: return wxT("HDM_DELETEITEM"); | |
7062 | case 0x1200 + 3: return wxT("HDM_GETITEMA"); | |
7063 | case 0x1200 + 11: return wxT("HDM_GETITEMW"); | |
7064 | case 0x1200 + 4: return wxT("HDM_SETITEMA"); | |
7065 | case 0x1200 + 12: return wxT("HDM_SETITEMW"); | |
7066 | case 0x1200 + 5: return wxT("HDM_LAYOUT"); | |
7067 | case 0x1200 + 6: return wxT("HDM_HITTEST"); | |
7068 | case 0x1200 + 7: return wxT("HDM_GETITEMRECT"); | |
7069 | case 0x1200 + 8: return wxT("HDM_SETIMAGELIST"); | |
7070 | case 0x1200 + 9: return wxT("HDM_GETIMAGELIST"); | |
7071 | case 0x1200 + 15: return wxT("HDM_ORDERTOINDEX"); | |
7072 | case 0x1200 + 16: return wxT("HDM_CREATEDRAGIMAGE"); | |
7073 | case 0x1200 + 17: return wxT("HDM_GETORDERARRAY"); | |
7074 | case 0x1200 + 18: return wxT("HDM_SETORDERARRAY"); | |
7075 | case 0x1200 + 19: return wxT("HDM_SETHOTDIVIDER"); | |
7076 | ||
7077 | // tab control | |
7078 | case 0x1300 + 2: return wxT("TCM_GETIMAGELIST"); | |
7079 | case 0x1300 + 3: return wxT("TCM_SETIMAGELIST"); | |
7080 | case 0x1300 + 4: return wxT("TCM_GETITEMCOUNT"); | |
7081 | case 0x1300 + 5: return wxT("TCM_GETITEMA"); | |
7082 | case 0x1300 + 60: return wxT("TCM_GETITEMW"); | |
7083 | case 0x1300 + 6: return wxT("TCM_SETITEMA"); | |
7084 | case 0x1300 + 61: return wxT("TCM_SETITEMW"); | |
7085 | case 0x1300 + 7: return wxT("TCM_INSERTITEMA"); | |
7086 | case 0x1300 + 62: return wxT("TCM_INSERTITEMW"); | |
7087 | case 0x1300 + 8: return wxT("TCM_DELETEITEM"); | |
7088 | case 0x1300 + 9: return wxT("TCM_DELETEALLITEMS"); | |
7089 | case 0x1300 + 10: return wxT("TCM_GETITEMRECT"); | |
7090 | case 0x1300 + 11: return wxT("TCM_GETCURSEL"); | |
7091 | case 0x1300 + 12: return wxT("TCM_SETCURSEL"); | |
7092 | case 0x1300 + 13: return wxT("TCM_HITTEST"); | |
7093 | case 0x1300 + 14: return wxT("TCM_SETITEMEXTRA"); | |
7094 | case 0x1300 + 40: return wxT("TCM_ADJUSTRECT"); | |
7095 | case 0x1300 + 41: return wxT("TCM_SETITEMSIZE"); | |
7096 | case 0x1300 + 42: return wxT("TCM_REMOVEIMAGE"); | |
7097 | case 0x1300 + 43: return wxT("TCM_SETPADDING"); | |
7098 | case 0x1300 + 44: return wxT("TCM_GETROWCOUNT"); | |
7099 | case 0x1300 + 45: return wxT("TCM_GETTOOLTIPS"); | |
7100 | case 0x1300 + 46: return wxT("TCM_SETTOOLTIPS"); | |
7101 | case 0x1300 + 47: return wxT("TCM_GETCURFOCUS"); | |
7102 | case 0x1300 + 48: return wxT("TCM_SETCURFOCUS"); | |
7103 | case 0x1300 + 49: return wxT("TCM_SETMINTABWIDTH"); | |
7104 | case 0x1300 + 50: return wxT("TCM_DESELECTALL"); | |
7105 | ||
7106 | // toolbar | |
7107 | case WM_USER+1: return wxT("TB_ENABLEBUTTON"); | |
7108 | case WM_USER+2: return wxT("TB_CHECKBUTTON"); | |
7109 | case WM_USER+3: return wxT("TB_PRESSBUTTON"); | |
7110 | case WM_USER+4: return wxT("TB_HIDEBUTTON"); | |
7111 | case WM_USER+5: return wxT("TB_INDETERMINATE"); | |
7112 | case WM_USER+9: return wxT("TB_ISBUTTONENABLED"); | |
7113 | case WM_USER+10: return wxT("TB_ISBUTTONCHECKED"); | |
7114 | case WM_USER+11: return wxT("TB_ISBUTTONPRESSED"); | |
7115 | case WM_USER+12: return wxT("TB_ISBUTTONHIDDEN"); | |
7116 | case WM_USER+13: return wxT("TB_ISBUTTONINDETERMINATE"); | |
7117 | case WM_USER+17: return wxT("TB_SETSTATE"); | |
7118 | case WM_USER+18: return wxT("TB_GETSTATE"); | |
7119 | case WM_USER+19: return wxT("TB_ADDBITMAP"); | |
7120 | case WM_USER+20: return wxT("TB_ADDBUTTONS"); | |
7121 | case WM_USER+21: return wxT("TB_INSERTBUTTON"); | |
7122 | case WM_USER+22: return wxT("TB_DELETEBUTTON"); | |
7123 | case WM_USER+23: return wxT("TB_GETBUTTON"); | |
7124 | case WM_USER+24: return wxT("TB_BUTTONCOUNT"); | |
7125 | case WM_USER+25: return wxT("TB_COMMANDTOINDEX"); | |
7126 | case WM_USER+26: return wxT("TB_SAVERESTOREA"); | |
7127 | case WM_USER+76: return wxT("TB_SAVERESTOREW"); | |
7128 | case WM_USER+27: return wxT("TB_CUSTOMIZE"); | |
7129 | case WM_USER+28: return wxT("TB_ADDSTRINGA"); | |
7130 | case WM_USER+77: return wxT("TB_ADDSTRINGW"); | |
7131 | case WM_USER+29: return wxT("TB_GETITEMRECT"); | |
7132 | case WM_USER+30: return wxT("TB_BUTTONSTRUCTSIZE"); | |
7133 | case WM_USER+31: return wxT("TB_SETBUTTONSIZE"); | |
7134 | case WM_USER+32: return wxT("TB_SETBITMAPSIZE"); | |
7135 | case WM_USER+33: return wxT("TB_AUTOSIZE"); | |
7136 | case WM_USER+35: return wxT("TB_GETTOOLTIPS"); | |
7137 | case WM_USER+36: return wxT("TB_SETTOOLTIPS"); | |
7138 | case WM_USER+37: return wxT("TB_SETPARENT"); | |
7139 | case WM_USER+39: return wxT("TB_SETROWS"); | |
7140 | case WM_USER+40: return wxT("TB_GETROWS"); | |
7141 | case WM_USER+42: return wxT("TB_SETCMDID"); | |
7142 | case WM_USER+43: return wxT("TB_CHANGEBITMAP"); | |
7143 | case WM_USER+44: return wxT("TB_GETBITMAP"); | |
7144 | case WM_USER+45: return wxT("TB_GETBUTTONTEXTA"); | |
7145 | case WM_USER+75: return wxT("TB_GETBUTTONTEXTW"); | |
7146 | case WM_USER+46: return wxT("TB_REPLACEBITMAP"); | |
7147 | case WM_USER+47: return wxT("TB_SETINDENT"); | |
7148 | case WM_USER+48: return wxT("TB_SETIMAGELIST"); | |
7149 | case WM_USER+49: return wxT("TB_GETIMAGELIST"); | |
7150 | case WM_USER+50: return wxT("TB_LOADIMAGES"); | |
7151 | case WM_USER+51: return wxT("TB_GETRECT"); | |
7152 | case WM_USER+52: return wxT("TB_SETHOTIMAGELIST"); | |
7153 | case WM_USER+53: return wxT("TB_GETHOTIMAGELIST"); | |
7154 | case WM_USER+54: return wxT("TB_SETDISABLEDIMAGELIST"); | |
7155 | case WM_USER+55: return wxT("TB_GETDISABLEDIMAGELIST"); | |
7156 | case WM_USER+56: return wxT("TB_SETSTYLE"); | |
7157 | case WM_USER+57: return wxT("TB_GETSTYLE"); | |
7158 | case WM_USER+58: return wxT("TB_GETBUTTONSIZE"); | |
7159 | case WM_USER+59: return wxT("TB_SETBUTTONWIDTH"); | |
7160 | case WM_USER+60: return wxT("TB_SETMAXTEXTROWS"); | |
7161 | case WM_USER+61: return wxT("TB_GETTEXTROWS"); | |
7162 | case WM_USER+41: return wxT("TB_GETBITMAPFLAGS"); | |
7163 | ||
7164 | default: | |
7165 | static wxString s_szBuf; | |
7166 | s_szBuf.Printf(wxT("<unknown message = %d>"), message); | |
7167 | return s_szBuf.c_str(); | |
7168 | } | |
7169 | } | |
7170 | #endif // wxDEBUG_LEVEL >= 2 | |
7171 | ||
7172 | static TEXTMETRIC wxGetTextMetrics(const wxWindowMSW *win) | |
7173 | { | |
7174 | // prepare the DC | |
7175 | TEXTMETRIC tm; | |
7176 | HWND hwnd = GetHwndOf(win); | |
7177 | HDC hdc = ::GetDC(hwnd); | |
7178 | ||
7179 | #if !wxDIALOG_UNIT_COMPATIBILITY | |
7180 | // and select the current font into it | |
7181 | HFONT hfont = GetHfontOf(win->GetFont()); | |
7182 | if ( hfont ) | |
7183 | { | |
7184 | hfont = (HFONT)::SelectObject(hdc, hfont); | |
7185 | } | |
7186 | #endif | |
7187 | ||
7188 | // finally retrieve the text metrics from it | |
7189 | GetTextMetrics(hdc, &tm); | |
7190 | ||
7191 | #if !wxDIALOG_UNIT_COMPATIBILITY | |
7192 | // and clean up | |
7193 | if ( hfont ) | |
7194 | { | |
7195 | (void)::SelectObject(hdc, hfont); | |
7196 | } | |
7197 | #endif | |
7198 | ||
7199 | ::ReleaseDC(hwnd, hdc); | |
7200 | ||
7201 | return tm; | |
7202 | } | |
7203 | ||
7204 | // Find the wxWindow at the current mouse position, returning the mouse | |
7205 | // position. | |
7206 | wxWindow* wxFindWindowAtPointer(wxPoint& pt) | |
7207 | { | |
7208 | pt = wxGetMousePosition(); | |
7209 | return wxFindWindowAtPoint(pt); | |
7210 | } | |
7211 | ||
7212 | wxWindow* wxFindWindowAtPoint(const wxPoint& pt) | |
7213 | { | |
7214 | POINT pt2; | |
7215 | pt2.x = pt.x; | |
7216 | pt2.y = pt.y; | |
7217 | ||
7218 | HWND hWnd = ::WindowFromPoint(pt2); | |
7219 | ||
7220 | return wxGetWindowFromHWND((WXHWND)hWnd); | |
7221 | } | |
7222 | ||
7223 | // Get the current mouse position. | |
7224 | wxPoint wxGetMousePosition() | |
7225 | { | |
7226 | POINT pt; | |
7227 | #ifdef __WXWINCE__ | |
7228 | GetCursorPosWinCE(&pt); | |
7229 | #else | |
7230 | GetCursorPos( & pt ); | |
7231 | #endif | |
7232 | ||
7233 | return wxPoint(pt.x, pt.y); | |
7234 | } | |
7235 | ||
7236 | #if wxUSE_HOTKEY | |
7237 | ||
7238 | #if defined(__SMARTPHONE__) || defined(__POCKETPC__) | |
7239 | static void WinCEUnregisterHotKey(int modifiers, int id) | |
7240 | { | |
7241 | // Register hotkeys for the hardware buttons | |
7242 | HINSTANCE hCoreDll; | |
7243 | typedef BOOL (WINAPI *UnregisterFunc1Proc)(UINT, UINT); | |
7244 | ||
7245 | UnregisterFunc1Proc procUnregisterFunc; | |
7246 | hCoreDll = LoadLibrary(wxT("coredll.dll")); | |
7247 | if (hCoreDll) | |
7248 | { | |
7249 | procUnregisterFunc = (UnregisterFunc1Proc)GetProcAddress(hCoreDll, wxT("UnregisterFunc1")); | |
7250 | if (procUnregisterFunc) | |
7251 | procUnregisterFunc(modifiers, id); | |
7252 | FreeLibrary(hCoreDll); | |
7253 | } | |
7254 | } | |
7255 | #endif | |
7256 | ||
7257 | bool wxWindowMSW::RegisterHotKey(int hotkeyId, int modifiers, int keycode) | |
7258 | { | |
7259 | UINT win_modifiers=0; | |
7260 | if ( modifiers & wxMOD_ALT ) | |
7261 | win_modifiers |= MOD_ALT; | |
7262 | if ( modifiers & wxMOD_SHIFT ) | |
7263 | win_modifiers |= MOD_SHIFT; | |
7264 | if ( modifiers & wxMOD_CONTROL ) | |
7265 | win_modifiers |= MOD_CONTROL; | |
7266 | if ( modifiers & wxMOD_WIN ) | |
7267 | win_modifiers |= MOD_WIN; | |
7268 | ||
7269 | #if defined(__SMARTPHONE__) || defined(__POCKETPC__) | |
7270 | // Required for PPC and Smartphone hardware buttons | |
7271 | if (keycode >= WXK_SPECIAL1 && keycode <= WXK_SPECIAL20) | |
7272 | WinCEUnregisterHotKey(win_modifiers, hotkeyId); | |
7273 | #endif | |
7274 | ||
7275 | if ( !::RegisterHotKey(GetHwnd(), hotkeyId, win_modifiers, keycode) ) | |
7276 | { | |
7277 | wxLogLastError(wxT("RegisterHotKey")); | |
7278 | ||
7279 | return false; | |
7280 | } | |
7281 | ||
7282 | return true; | |
7283 | } | |
7284 | ||
7285 | bool wxWindowMSW::UnregisterHotKey(int hotkeyId) | |
7286 | { | |
7287 | #if defined(__SMARTPHONE__) || defined(__POCKETPC__) | |
7288 | WinCEUnregisterHotKey(MOD_WIN, hotkeyId); | |
7289 | #endif | |
7290 | ||
7291 | if ( !::UnregisterHotKey(GetHwnd(), hotkeyId) ) | |
7292 | { | |
7293 | wxLogLastError(wxT("UnregisterHotKey")); | |
7294 | ||
7295 | return false; | |
7296 | } | |
7297 | ||
7298 | return true; | |
7299 | } | |
7300 | ||
7301 | #if wxUSE_ACCEL | |
7302 | ||
7303 | bool wxWindowMSW::HandleHotKey(WXWPARAM wParam, WXLPARAM lParam) | |
7304 | { | |
7305 | int win_modifiers = LOWORD(lParam); | |
7306 | ||
7307 | wxKeyEvent event(CreateKeyEvent(wxEVT_HOTKEY, HIWORD(lParam))); | |
7308 | event.SetId(wParam); | |
7309 | event.m_shiftDown = (win_modifiers & MOD_SHIFT) != 0; | |
7310 | event.m_controlDown = (win_modifiers & MOD_CONTROL) != 0; | |
7311 | event.m_altDown = (win_modifiers & MOD_ALT) != 0; | |
7312 | event.m_metaDown = (win_modifiers & MOD_WIN) != 0; | |
7313 | ||
7314 | return HandleWindowEvent(event); | |
7315 | } | |
7316 | ||
7317 | #endif // wxUSE_ACCEL | |
7318 | ||
7319 | #endif // wxUSE_HOTKEY | |
7320 | ||
7321 | // Not tested under WinCE | |
7322 | #ifndef __WXWINCE__ | |
7323 | ||
7324 | // this class installs a message hook which really wakes up our idle processing | |
7325 | // each time a WM_NULL is received (wxWakeUpIdle does this), even if we're | |
7326 | // sitting inside a local modal loop (e.g. a menu is opened or scrollbar is | |
7327 | // being dragged or even inside ::MessageBox()) and so don't control message | |
7328 | // dispatching otherwise | |
7329 | class wxIdleWakeUpModule : public wxModule | |
7330 | { | |
7331 | public: | |
7332 | virtual bool OnInit() | |
7333 | { | |
7334 | ms_hMsgHookProc = ::SetWindowsHookEx | |
7335 | ( | |
7336 | WH_GETMESSAGE, | |
7337 | &wxIdleWakeUpModule::MsgHookProc, | |
7338 | NULL, | |
7339 | GetCurrentThreadId() | |
7340 | ); | |
7341 | ||
7342 | if ( !ms_hMsgHookProc ) | |
7343 | { | |
7344 | wxLogLastError(wxT("SetWindowsHookEx(WH_GETMESSAGE)")); | |
7345 | ||
7346 | return false; | |
7347 | } | |
7348 | ||
7349 | return true; | |
7350 | } | |
7351 | ||
7352 | virtual void OnExit() | |
7353 | { | |
7354 | ::UnhookWindowsHookEx(wxIdleWakeUpModule::ms_hMsgHookProc); | |
7355 | } | |
7356 | ||
7357 | static LRESULT CALLBACK MsgHookProc(int nCode, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam) | |
7358 | { | |
7359 | MSG *msg = (MSG*)lParam; | |
7360 | ||
7361 | // only process the message if it is actually going to be removed from | |
7362 | // the message queue, this prevents that the same event from being | |
7363 | // processed multiple times if now someone just called PeekMessage() | |
7364 | if ( msg->message == WM_NULL && wParam == PM_REMOVE ) | |
7365 | { | |
7366 | wxTheApp->ProcessPendingEvents(); | |
7367 | } | |
7368 | ||
7369 | return CallNextHookEx(ms_hMsgHookProc, nCode, wParam, lParam); | |
7370 | } | |
7371 | ||
7372 | private: | |
7373 | static HHOOK ms_hMsgHookProc; | |
7374 | ||
7375 | DECLARE_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxIdleWakeUpModule) | |
7376 | }; | |
7377 | ||
7378 | HHOOK wxIdleWakeUpModule::ms_hMsgHookProc = 0; | |
7379 | ||
7380 | IMPLEMENT_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxIdleWakeUpModule, wxModule) | |
7381 | ||
7382 | #endif // __WXWINCE__ | |
7383 | ||
7384 | #ifdef __WXWINCE__ | |
7385 | ||
7386 | #if wxUSE_STATBOX | |
7387 | static void wxAdjustZOrder(wxWindow* parent) | |
7388 | { | |
7389 | if (parent->IsKindOf(CLASSINFO(wxStaticBox))) | |
7390 | { | |
7391 | // Set the z-order correctly | |
7392 | SetWindowPos((HWND) parent->GetHWND(), HWND_BOTTOM, 0, 0, 0, 0, SWP_NOMOVE|SWP_NOSIZE); | |
7393 | } | |
7394 | ||
7395 | wxWindowList::compatibility_iterator current = parent->GetChildren().GetFirst(); | |
7396 | while (current) | |
7397 | { | |
7398 | wxWindow *childWin = current->GetData(); | |
7399 | wxAdjustZOrder(childWin); | |
7400 | current = current->GetNext(); | |
7401 | } | |
7402 | } | |
7403 | #endif | |
7404 | ||
7405 | // We need to adjust the z-order of static boxes in WinCE, to | |
7406 | // make 'contained' controls visible | |
7407 | void wxWindowMSW::OnInitDialog( wxInitDialogEvent& event ) | |
7408 | { | |
7409 | #if wxUSE_STATBOX | |
7410 | wxAdjustZOrder(this); | |
7411 | #endif | |
7412 | ||
7413 | event.Skip(); | |
7414 | } | |
7415 | #endif |